FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB63 802.11b/g PCIExpress Minicard

 

User Guide Chapter 1. Getting Started 2 Product Features 3 Before You Start 7 Contents Safety Precautions 8 Proper Posture During Computer Use 24 27 Important Safety Information Replacement Parts and Accessories 30 33 Regulatory Compliance Statements 48 WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION Overview 50 56 Turning the Computer On and Off Product Features PC in Hand

Improved portability through its compact size and light-weight design

Slim, Polished Design Small but Powerful PC

An Intel Atom Processor with Low Power Consumption and Low Heat

Extended Use Time through the use of Power-

Versatile and Convenient Use

A Camera Module for Video Chatting or Conferencing (Optional)

Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Function (Optional)

Multi Card Slot Support

Easy-to-Use Keyboard Optional items may be changed or may not be provided depending on the computer model. 2 Before You Start

User Guide Information This product is supplied with an Installation Guide, and a User Guide. You can even more easily and conveniently use the computer by using any of the guides depending on your needs. Installation Guide This guide is provided so that you can conveniently refer to this guide when

purchasing it. This document includes the computer components and the connection procedures. User Guide You are currently reading the User Guide.

select Start > All Programs > Samsung

> User Guide > User Guide. This document includes the computer functions, how to use the functions, and how to use the program. Utilizing the User Guide

Be sure to read the Safety Precautions before using the computer.

Refer to the separately supplied Installation Guide when installing your computer.

Refer to the User Guide for the procedures to use the computer.

Using the Index of the User Guide,

Using the Glossary of the User

for technical terms.

If a problem occurs, refer to the Q & A included in the User Guide.

Optional items, some devices and software referred to in the User Guide may not be provided and/or changed by upgrade. Note that the computer environment referred in the User Guide may not be the same as your own environment. 3

Images used in this User Guide may differ from actual product.

This guide decribes procedures for using both the mouse and the touchpad.

The illustrations provided in this guide assume that your operating system is Windows XP. These illustrations are subject to change.

The User guide supplied with this computer may vary depending on your model. Safety Precaution Notations Icon Notation Warning Caution Text Notations Icon Notation Description

cause personal injury and or fatality.

cause slight injury to yourself or damage your property. Description Note Caution Before You Start Content included in this section includes information required before using a function. Content included in this section includes information required about the function. Content included in this section includes helpful information to use the function. This notation represents the page number you can refer to for information about related functions or as a reference. This represents a menu path to run a program.

All Programs > Samsung

> User Guide > User Guide in this order from the menu. XX Start > All Programs

> Samsung > User Guide > User Guide 4 Copyright 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. owns the copyright of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without the consent of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. The information in this document is subject to change without notice due to improving the performance of the product.

Precautions for Operating System Support If a problem occurs because of the reinstallation of other operating systems(OS) or a previous version of a OS pre-installed on this computer, or a software that does not support the OS, the company will not provide technical support, a replacement or refund, and if our service engineer visits you due to this problem, a service charge will be applied. 5 About the Product Capacity Representation Standard About HDD Capacity Representation The capacity of the storage device (HDD, SSD) of the manufacturer is calculated assuming that 1KB=1,000 Bytes. However, the operating system (Windows) calculates the storage device capacity assuming that 1KB=1,024 Bytes, and therefore the capacity representation of the HDD in Windows is smaller than the actual capacity due to the difference in capacity calculation.

(E.g. For a 80GB HDD, Windows represents the capacity as 74.5GB, 80x1,000x1,000x1,000 byte/(1,024x1,024x1,024)byte = 74.505GB) In addition, the capacity representation in Windows may be even smaller because some programs such as Recovery Solution may reside in a hidden area of the HDD. About Memory Capacity Representation The memory capacity reported in Windows is lesser than the actual capacity of memory. This is because BIOS or a video adapter uses a portion of memory or claims it for further use.

(E.g. For 1GB(=1,024MB) memory installed, Windows may report the capacity as 1,022MB or less)

Setup, accessible by pressing F2 enter the BIOS Setup, refer to "Settings and Upgrade" in the User Guide. 6 Contents Chapter 1. Getting Started 2 Product Features 3 Before You Start 7 Contents Safety Precautions 8 Proper Posture During Computer Use 24 27 Important Safety Information 30 Replacement Parts and Accessories Regulatory Compliance Statements 33 48 WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION 50 Overview Turning the Computer On and Off 56 Chapter 2. Using the Computer Keyboard Touchpad External-type CD drive

(To be purchased) Multi Card Slot Connecting a monitor / TV Adjusting the Volume Chapter 3. Using Microsoft 65 67 70 74 59 62 Windows XP About Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Screen Layout Control Panel Chapter 4. Using the Network Wired Network Wireless Network 78 80 84 90 93 7 Using Samsung Network Manager

(Optional) Bluetooth (Optional) Chapter 5. Using Applications Introducing Programs Play Camera (Optional) Samsung Update Plus (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) Using Samsung Magic Doctor

(Optional) Reinstalling Software Chapter 6. Settings and Upgrade LCD Brightness Control BIOS Setup Setting a Boot Password Changing the Boot Priority Upgrading Memory Battery Using the Security Lock Port Chapter 7. Appendix Reinstalling Windows XP Using Samsung Recovery Solution

(Optional) Questions and Answers

Glossary Index Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE 99 109 123 126 128 130 135 136 139 141 145 148 149 151 158 160 165 174

3 204 208 209 Safety Precautions For your security and to prevent damage, please read the following safety instructions

differ from actual product. Warning

even fatality. Installation Related Do not install the computer on a slant or a place prone to vibrations, or avoid using the computer in that location for a long time.

a malfunction or damage to the product will occur. Keep a distance of 15cm or more between the computer and the wall and do not place any objects between them. This may increase the internal temperature of the computer and may cause an injury. Do not install the product in places exposed to humidity such as a bathrooms. There is a danger of

the product within the operating conditions

Manufacturers User Guide. Keep the plastic bags out of the reach of children. There is a danger of suffocation. 8

Power Related The power plug and

differ depending on the

and the product model. Do not touch the mains plug or power cord with wet hands. There is a danger of

Do not exceed the standard capacity

(voltage/current) of a multi-plug or power outlet extension when using it for the product. There is a danger of

hazard. 9

If the power cord or power outlet makes a noise, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and contact a service center. There is a danger of

hazard. Do not use a damaged or loose mains plug or power cord or power outlet. There is a danger of

hazard. Avoid exposing any part of your body to the heat from the computer vent for a long time when it is on. Exposing a part of your body to the heat from the vent for long periods of time may cause a burn. Avoid blocking the vent at the bottom or side of the computer when using it on a bed or cushion.

there is a danger of damaging the computer or overheating the inside of the computer. Do not bend the power cord excessively or do not place a heavy object over the power cord. It is especially important to keep the power cord out of reach of infants and pets. If the cord is damaged, it

If water or another substance enters the power input jack, AC adapter or the computer, disconnect the power cord and contact the service center. Damage to the device within the computer may

hazard. Plug the power cord

outlet and AC adapter. Failing to do so may cause

Do not unplug the power cord out by pulling the cable only. If the cord is damaged, it

10 AC Adapter Usage Precautions Connect the power cord

Otherwise, there is a

incomplete contact. Do not place heavy objects or step onto the power cord or AC adapter to avoid damaging the power cord or AC adapter. If the cord is damaged, there is a danger of

Use only the AC adapter supplied with the product. Using another adapter may cause the screen to

11 Battery Usage Related Keep the battery out of the reach of infants and pets, as they could put the battery into their mouths. There is a danger of

Authorized Parts Use an authorized battery and AC adapter only. Please use an authorized battery and adapter approved by Samsung Electronics. Unauthorized batteries and adapters may not meet the proper safety requirements and may cause problems or malfunctions and result in

12 Do not use the computer in a badly ventilated location such as on bedding, on a pillow or cushion, etc, and do not use it in a location such as room with

cause the computer to overheat.

computer vents (on the side or the bottom) are

these environments. If

computer may overheat and it may cause a computer problem, or even explosion. Do not use the computer in a humid location such as a bathroom or sauna. Please use the computer within the recommended temperature and humidity range (10~32C, 20~80%

RH). Power Off Do not close the LCD panel and put the computer into your bag to move it when it is still turned on. If you put the computer into your bag without turning it off, the computer may overheat and there is

computer down properly before moving it. Never heat the battery or put the battery into

use the battery in a hot location such as a sauna, inside a vehicle exposed to the heat, and so on. There is a danger of an

13 Take care not to allow metal objects such as a key or clip to touch the battery terminal (metal parts). If a metal object touches the battery terminals, it may cause excessive

damage the battery, or

If liquid leaks out of the battery or there is a funny smell coming from the battery, remove the battery from the computer and contact a service center. There is a danger of an

To use the computer safely, replace a dead battery with a new, authorized battery. Please charge the battery fully before using the computer

14 Usage Related Do not connect a phone line connected to a digital phone to the modem. There is a danger of a

damage to the product. Disconnect all cables connected to the computer before cleaning it. If you are using a notebook computer, remove the battery. There is a danger of

to the product. Do not place any

water or chemicals over or near the computer. If water or chemicals enter the computer, this

15 If the computer is broken or dropped, disconnect the power cord and contact a service center for a safety check.

Avoid direct sunlight when the computer is in an air-tight location such as inside a vehicle.

hazard. The computer may overheat and also present opportunity to thieves. Upgrade Related Never disassemble the power supply or AC adapter. There is a danger of

When removing the RTC (Real Time Clock) battery, keep it out of the reach of children as they could touch and/or swallow it. There is a danger of

swallowed it, contact a doctor immediately. Use only authorized parts (multi-plug, battery and memory) and never disassemble parts. There is a danger of damaging the product,

hazard. Shut down the computer and disconnect all cables before disassembling the computer. If there is a modem, disconnect the phone line. If you are using a notebook computer, make sure to remove the battery. Failing to do so, may

16 Custody and Movement Related Follow the instructions for the relevant location (e.g. airplane, hospital, etc.) when using a wireless communication device (wireless LAN, Bluetooth, etc.). When carrying the notebook computer with other items, such as the adapter, mouse, books etc, take care not to press anything against the notebook computer. If a heavy object is pressed against the

white stop or stain may appear on the LCD.

to apply any pressure to

In this case, place the

separate compartment away from the other objects. 17 Caution

to the product. Installation Related Do not block the ports

(holes), vents, etc. of the product and do not insert objects. Damage to a component within the computer may

When using the computer with it lying on its side, place it so that the vents face upwards. Failing to do so, may cause the internal temperature of the computer to rise and the computer to malfunction or halt. Do not place a heavy object over the product. This may cause a problem with the computer. In addition, the object may fall and cause injury, or damage the computer. Battery Usage Related Dispose of worn-out batteries properly.

method may differ depending on your country and region. Dispose of the used battery in an appropriate way. Do not throw or disassemble the battery and do not put it into water. This may cause an

18 Usage Related Do not place a candle, lighted cigar, etc. over or on the product.

Use a wall outlet or multi-plug with a grounding part. Failing to do so may

hazard. Make sure to have the product tested by a safety service engineer after repairing the product. Authorized Samsung Repair Centers will carry

repair. Using a repaired product without testing it for safety may cause an

Use only a battery authorized by Samsung Electronics. Failing to do so may cause an explosion. Do not heat the battery or expose it to heat (e.g. inside a vehicle during the summer). There is a danger of

Avoid contact with metal objects such as car keys or clips when keeping or carrying a battery. Contact with a metal may cause excessive current and a high temperature and may damage the

Charge the battery according to the instructions in the manual. Failing to do so, may cause an explosion or

product. 19 In case of lightning, immediately turn the system off, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and line do not use a modem or phone. There is a danger of

Do not use your computer and AC-

Adapter on your lap or soft surfaces. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself. Connect only permitted devices to the connectors or ports of the computer. Failing to do so, may

Close the LCD panel only after checking if the notebook computer is turned off. The temperature may rise and it may cause overheating and deformation of the product. Do not press the Eject Button while the Floppy Disk/CD-ROM drive is in operation. You might lose data and

ejected and could cause an injury. Take care not to drop the product while using it. This may cause personal injury or loss of data. Do not contact the antenna with electricity facility such as the power outlet. There is a danger of

When handling computer parts, follow the instructions on the manual supplied with the parts. Failing to do so, may cause damage to the product. If the computer emits smoke, or there is a burning smell, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet and contact a service center. If your computer is a notebook computer, make sure to remove the battery.

20 Do not use a damaged

Disk. There is a danger of damaging the product or personal injury. Do not insert your

Slot. There is a danger of injury

Use recommended computer cleansing solution when cleaning the product and only use the computer when it is completely dried. Failing to do so may cause

Emergency disk eject method using paperclip should not be used while the disk is in motion. Make sure to use the emergency disk eject method only when the Optical Disk Drive is stopped. There is a danger of injury. Do not place your face close to the Optical Disk Drive tray when it is operating. There is a danger of injury due to an abrupt ejection. Check CDs for cracks and damage prior to use. It may damage the disc and cause disorder of device and injury of user. Upgrade Related Take care when touching the product or parts. The device may be damaged or you may be injured. Take care not to throw or drop a computer part or device. This may cause injury or damage to the product. Make sure to close the computer cover before connecting the power after a reassembly. There is a danger of

body touches an internal part. 21 Use parts authorized by Samsung Electronics only. Failing to do so, may

the product. Never disassemble or repair the product by yourself. There is a danger of

To connect a device that is not manufactured or authorized by Samsung Electronics, enquire at your service center before connecting the device. There is a danger of damaging the product. Custody and Movement Related When moving the product, turn the power off and separate all

The product might be damaged or users may trip over the cables. Do not operate or watch the computer while driving a vehicle. There is a danger of a

concentrate on driving. For long periods of not using the notebook computer, discharge the battery and preserve as it is detached. The battery will be preserved at its best condition. 22 Cautions on Preventing Data Loss (Hard Disk Management) Take care not to damage the data on a hard disk drive. Causes that may damage the data of a hard disk drive and the hard disk drive itself.

external impact that an external impact may cause loss of data on the

the computer or an impact on the computer when it is turned on may

drive.

of any data caused by a customers careless usage or bad environmental conditions.

while disassembling or assembling the computer.

computer is turned off or reset by a

is operating.

irrecoverable due to a computer virus infection.

turned off while running a program.

corrupted or bad sectors on the hard

To prevent data loss due to damage to the hard disk drive, please backup your data frequently. 23 Proper Posture During Computer Use Maintaining a proper posture during computer use is very important to prevent physical harm. The following instructions are about maintaining a proper posture during computer use developed through human engineering. Please read and follow them carefully when using the computer. Otherwise, the probability of (RSI: Repetitive Strain Injury) from repeated operations may increase and serious physical harm may be caused. The instructions in this manual have been prepared so that they can be applied within the coverage of general users. If the user is not included in the coverage, the recommendation is to be applied according to the users needs.

Keep the center of your leg weight not on the chair but on your feet when you are sitting on a chair.

the telephone, use a headset. Using the computer with the phone on your shoulder is bad for posture.

Keep frequently used items within a

can reach them with your hands). Proper Posture Adjust the heights of desks and chairs appropriate to your height. The heights are to be adjusted so that your arm forms a right angle when you

sitting down on a chair. Adjust the height of chair so that your heel

Do not use the computer while you are lying down, but only while you are sitting down.

Do not use the computer on your lap. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself.

24 Eye Position Keep the monitor or LCD away from your eyes by at least 50cm. Hand Position Keep your arm at a right angle as

c m 0 5

Adjust the height of the monitor and the LCD screen so that its top height is equal to or lower than your eyes.

Avoid setting the monitor and LCD excessively bright.

Keep the monitor and LCD screen clean.

If you wear glasses, clean them before using the computer.

When entering contents printed on a paper into the computer, use a static paper holder so that the height of the paper is almost equal to that of the monitor.

Keep the line from your elbow to your hand straight.

Do not place your palm over the

Do not hold the mouse with excessive force.

mouse with excessive force.

It is recommended connecting an

using the computer for long periods of time. 25 Volume Control

(Headphones and Speakers)

music. Use Time (Break Time)

for more than one hour. Illumination

locations. The illumination level for computer use must be as bright so for

Indirect illumination is recommended.

the LCD screen. Operation Condition

Do not use the computer in hot and humid locations.

Use the computer within the allowed temperature and humidity range

Check your volume!!

using headphones.

It is not recommended using headphones for long periods of time.

Any deviation from the equalizer default setting could cause hearing impairment.

The default setting can be changed through software and driver updates

usage. 26 Important Safety Information Safety Instructions Your system is designed and tested to meet the latest standards for safety of information technology equipment. However, to ensure safe use of this product, it is important that the safety

the documentation are followed. Always follow these instructions to help guard against personal injury and damage to your system. Setting Up your System

Read and follow all instructions

documentation before you operate your system. Retain all safety and operating instructions for future use.

Do not use this product near water or a heat source such as a radiator.

surface.

The product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the rating label. 27

Ensure that the electrical outlet you are using to power your equipment is

circuit.

If your computer has a voltage selector

the proper position for your area.

Openings in the computer case are

you provide adequate space, at least 6 inches (15 cm), around the system for

into the computer ventilation openings.

Ensure that the fan vents on the bottom of the casing are clear at all times. Do not place the computer on a soft

vents.

If you use an extension cord with this

rating on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord power rating. Care During Use

near your system.

Some products have a replaceable CMOS battery on the system board. There is a danger of explosion if the CMOS battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. If the CMOS battery

through the computer.

modem cables from the wall outlets before cleaning the system.

The power cord or plug is damaged. Liquid has been spilled into the system. The system does not operate properly when the operating instructions are followed. The system was dropped or the casing is damaged. The system performance changes. 28 The Instruction On Safety Operation of NotePC

When installing and operating devices please refer to safety requirements in the user guide.

reuse.

Service and repair of devices should be carried out by authorized service centers.

Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on

will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC Power is present). Allowing

29 Replacement Parts and Accessories Use only replacement parts and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

care areas of medical and dental facilities, oxygen rich environments, or industrial areas. Battery Disposal Do not put rechargeable batteries or products powered by non-removable rechargeable batteries in the garbage. Contact the Samsung Helpline for information on how to dispose of batteries that you cannot use or recharge any longer. Follow all local regulations when disposing of old batteries. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. 30 Laser Safety All systems equipped with CD or DVD drives comply with the appropriate safety

as Class 1 Laser Products under a US Department of Health and Human Services

(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard. Should the unit ever need servicing, contact an authorized service location.

Laser Safety Note:

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

exposure to laser beams, do not try to open the enclosure of a CD or DVD drive.

Class 1M laser radiation when operating part is open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.

Class 3B invisible laser radiation when open. Avoid exposure to the beam. Connect and Disconnect the AC adapter

Do not unplug the power cord out by pulling the cable only. 31 Power Cord Requirements The power cord set (wall plug, cable and AC adapter plug) you received with your computer meets the requirements for use in the country where you purchased your equipment. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the computer. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized dealer, reseller, or service provider. General Requirements The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

The length of the power cord set must be at least 6.00 feet (1.8m) and a maximum of 9.75 feet (3.0m).

All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be used.

The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 7 A and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each countrys power system.

320 Standard Sheet C7 connector, for mating with appliance inlet on the computer. 32 Regulatory Compliance Statements Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your

operating a wireless device.

on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.

energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels,

As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed on the next page:

33

Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.

communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.

harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be

atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use

on the wireless device.

Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with

trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country.

If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled.

Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.

manufacturer for service.

Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information. 34 United States of America USA and Canada Safety Requirements and Notices Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged.

The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter

near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless

Use On Aircraft Caution Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-

frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the

The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency.

product not expressly approved by Intel could void the users authority to operate this device. 35

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.

helpful: Something About Interference. This is available at FCC local regional

for any radio or television interference

of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and

by our company. The correction will be the responsibility of the user. Use only shielded data cables with this system. Unintentional Emitter per FCC Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generate uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

36 Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN type devices

(radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present

This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your

United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and

/or damage this device. The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device

(or devices), which may be embedded

exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.

will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. 37 FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:

While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device can not be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. FCC Part 68

This equipment compiles with part

equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number

(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment uses the following USOC

An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed

or promises wiring using a compatible

See Installation Instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed

devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by total RENs, contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. 38 If the terminal equipment causes harm

Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right

believe it is necessary.

changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advanced notice in order for

maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment (Modem) for repair or warranty information, please contact your local distributor. If the equipment is causing

telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The user must use the accessories and cables supplied by the manufacturer to get optimum performance from the product. No repairs may be done by the customer. This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act

to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on

of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be any number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, refer to your communications software user manual. 39 Canada Unintentional Emitter per ICES-003 This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limitesapplicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par Industrie Canada. Intentional Emitter per RSS 210 Low power, Radio LAN type devices

(radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present

This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your

Canada if an Industry Canada ID number is on the system label. When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-

GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 40 To prevent radio interference to licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in

device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25-

to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85 GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm

(8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device

(or devices), which may be embedded

RF exposure limits as set by Industry Canada. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 41

protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

equipment malfunction do not

connections by yourself. Contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. Telecommunications per DOC

IC-compliant modem)

means that the equipment meets certain

operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users

to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may

connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. 42 European Union European Union CE Marking and Compliance Notices Products intended for sale within the

which indicates compliance with the applicable Directives and European

below. This equipment also carries the

The following information is only applicable to systems labeled with the CE

. European Directives This Information Technology Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the following European directives:

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC with amending directives 92/31/EEC &

93/68/EEC as per EN 55022 Class B EN 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-3 EN 55024

Low Voltage Directive (Safety) 73/23/

EEC as per EN 60950(A1/A2/A3/A4/

A11)

Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 199/5/EC as per

device)

band embedded wireless device)

GHz band embedded wireless device)

GHz band embedded wireless device)

band embedded wireless device) 43 European Radio Approval

EU-approved radio devices)

low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your

applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your

European Union or associated areas

Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you

limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. See 802.11b and 802.11g restrictions

within countries under the heading European Economic Area Restrictions below. Translated Statements of Compliance

[English]

This product follows the provisions of the European Directive 1999/5/EC.

[Danish]

[Dutch]

Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 1999/5/EC.

[Finnish]

[French]

Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Europenne 1999/5/EC.

[German]

Bestimmungen der Europischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EC

[Greek]

[Icelandic]

Efnahags Bandalagsins nmer 1999/5/EC

[Italian]

Questo prodotto conforme alla Direttiva Europea 1999/5/EC. 44

[Norwegian]

1999/5/EC.

[Portuguese]

Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Europia 1999/5/EC.

[Spanish]

Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 1999/5/EC.

[Swedish]

European Economic Area Restrictions Local Restriction of 802.11b/802.11g Radio Usage

[Note to integrator: The following statements on local restrictions must be published in all end-user documentation provided with the system or product incorporating the wireless product.]

Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11b/802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11b/802.11g products are

countries or regions, and are not allowed to be operated in countries or regions other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries or regions for which they were intended and for verifying

correct selection of frequency and channel for the country or region of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country or region of use could be an infringement of local law and may be punished as such. 45 France For Metropolitan departments:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.400 - 2.454 GHz (channels 1 to 7) for outdoor use. For Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor and outdoor use. For Reunion, Guyane:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz for outdoor use

(channels 5 to 13) The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. The European variant is intended for use throughout the European Economic Area. However, authorization for use is further restricted in particular countries or regions within countries, as follows:

General European standards dictate maximum radiated transmit power of 100 mW effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) and the frequency range 2400 2483.5 MHz. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Belgium The product may be used outdoors, but for outdoor transmissions over a distance of 300m or more, a license from the BIPT is required. This restriction should be indicated in the manual as follows:

Dans le cas dune utilisation prive, lextrieur dun btiment, au-dessus dun espace public, aucun enregistrement nest ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de lIBPT est requise. Pour une utilisation publique lextrieur de btiments, une licence de lIBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter lIBPT. 46 This equipment has been approved to Council Decision 98/482/EEC - CTR 21 for Pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched

However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact manufacturer Technical Support. European Telecommunication

EU-approved modems) indicates

compliance of this equipment to the Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment

indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards:

CTR 21 - Attachment requirements for pan-European approval for connection to the analogue Public Switched Telephone

supporting voice telephony services) in

by means of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

(DTMF) signaling. Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect (pulse) or DTMF (tone) signaling, only the performance of the DTMF signaling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signaling for access to public or private emergency services. DTMF signaling also provides faster call setup. 47 WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION Correct disposal of this product

(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems.)

harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product,

environmentally safe recycling.

purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. 48 Correct disposal of batteries in this product Pb

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)

product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their

battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. USA ONLY This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Maganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA. Perchlorate Material- special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws. For details see lamprecycle.org, eise.org, or call 1-800-Samsung. 49 Overview Front View 7 1 2 3

Optional items may be changed or may not be provided depending on the computer model.

The actual color and appearance of the computer may differ from the pictures used in this guide. 4 5 6 1 Camera Lens (Optional) 2 Microphone 3 Keyboard 4 Touchpad/Touchpad 59 You can use the built-in microphone.

The touchpad and touchpad buttons provide functions similar to the mouse ball and buttons. A card slot that supports SD Card, SDHC and MMC. Shows the operating status of the computer. The corresponding operating LED is lit when the 51 corresponding function operates. The screen images are displayed here. 62 67 Buttons 5 Multi Card Slot 6 Status Indicators 7 LCD 50 Status Indicators 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Num Lock 2 Caps Lock This turns on when the Num

61 This turns on when the Caps

capital letters to be typed without holding the Shift button down. 3 Scroll Lock 4 HDD/

SSD 5 Wireless LAN 6 Charge Status 7 Power 51 This turns on when the Scroll

61

This turns on when the hard

is being accessed. This turns on when the wireless LAN is operating. This shows the power source and the battery charge status. Green: When the battery is fully charged or the battery is not installed. Amber: When the battery is being charged. Off: When the computer is running on battery power without being connected to AC adapter. This shows the computer operating status. On:

When the computer is operating. Blinks: When the computer is in Sleep mode. Right View 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Headphone Jack

2 Microphone Jack 3 USB Port 4 Monitor Port 5 Security Lock Port 6 Power Button You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a

A port used to connect a monitor, TV or projector supporting a 15pin D-SUB interface. 70

prevent the computer from being stolen. 56 Turns the computer on and off. 56 52 Left View 1 2 3 4 1 DC Jack 2 Wired LAN Port 3 Fan Vents

computer. Connect the Ethernet cable to this port. The internal heat of the computer is emitted through these holes. 90

4 USB Port You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a

53 Back View 1 1 Battery This is a Lithium-Ion rechargeable battery that supplies power to the computer. 151 54 Bottom View 1 2 3 1 Battery Latches 2 Memory Compartment Cover 3 Speaker The latch used to remove or install the battery. 152 The main memory is installed inside the cover. 149 A device used to generate sound. 55 Turning the Computer On and Off 4 Power button LED is lit while the computer is turned on. LED

When running the computer on battery power, the LCD brightness is dimmed automatically to save battery power. Press the Fn +

the LCD brightness. 61

When turning the computer on

Windows screen appears. You can use the computer after registering your user information. Turning the computer on 1 Install the battery and connect the AC adapter.

(Refer to the Installation Guide.) 2 Lift the LCD panel up. 3 Press the Power button to turn the computer on. 56 Turning the computer off 1 Start 2 Turn Off Computer.

3 Turn Off.

If the computer has not turned off properly due to a system error, press

<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete> Shut Down > Turn Off damaged.

If <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete>

performed, before Windows starts. 57 Chapter 2. Using the computer Keyboard Touchpad External-type CD drive

(To be purchased) Multi Card Slot Connecting a monitor / TV Adjusting the Volume 59 62 65 67 70 74 Keyboard

United Kingdom United States 59 Shortcut Keys

Fn Fn+

Name REST

(Sleep Mode) Gauge Euro CRT/LCD Backlit Mute Samsung Magic Doctor Easy SpeedUp Manager Function

Power button. Shows the remaining battery charge. You can only use this function when the Easy Display Manager program is installed. Enters the Euro monetary unit symbol.

Switches the screen output to the LCD or external monitor when an external monitor (or TV) is connected to the computer. 71

Mutes or cancels mute. System diagnosis, recovery and Internet consultation program, Samsung Magic Doctor, will be launched. You can select operation mode when you need maximum system

Silent: Low-noise and low power consumption mode

Normal: Normal Mode

Speed: Maximum performance mode. The system operates in its maximum performance, and system resources are allocated to the currently active program with priority for maximum performance. 60 Fn+

Name Function Wireless LAN Turns the wireless LAN function on or off in models with wireless LAN capability. Turns the Touchpad function on or off. When using an external mouse only, you can turn the Touchpad off.

down without changing the cursor location in some applications. Touchpad Num Lock Scroll Lock Screen Brightness Control To adjust the LCD brightness press the Fn +

Fn +

The changed screen brightness is displayed at the center of the screen for a moment. Numeric Key The numbers are printed in blue on the

Fn +

Volume Control To control the volume, press the Fn +

Fn +

combination. You can mute the sound or cancel the

Fn +

Other Function Keys Application Key

(touchpad). 61 Touchpad The touchpad provides the same function as a mouse and the left and right buttons of the touchpad plays the role of the left and right buttons of a mouse.

Touchpad.

If you touch the Touchpad or press the Touchpad buttons while booting up, the Windows boot time may be extended. Touchpad Use to move the cursor. Touchpad Left Button You can select or run a program using this button. Scroll Area Plays the role of the mouse wheel. You can scroll up and down using the Scroll Area. Touchpad Right Button Plays the role of the right mouse button. 62 Moving the cursor on the screen Double-Click Function

The mouse cursor will move accordingly.

to move the cursor.

item you want. Alternatively, press the left touchpad

TapTap ClickClick or Click Function

Alternatively, press the left touchpad button once. Right Button Function

mouse button. Press the right touchpad button once. The corresponding pop-up menu appears. Tap or Click Click 63 Drag Function Dragging refers to moving an item to another place after selecting it. Press and hold down the left touchpad button over an item you want to drag and move the item to the new location. Touchpad On/Off Function If you want to use the mouse only without using the touchpad, you can turn the touchpad off.

Fn +

Holding down the left touchpad button Move You can set the touchpad and touchpad button settings in the tabs

Start >

Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. Touchpad Scroll Function The touchpad scroll area provides the mouse wheel function (scroll function).

edge for vertical scrolling or the bottom edge for horizontal scrolling and then

the screen vertically or horizontally. 64 External-type CD drive (To be purchased) This computer supports an external USB CD-ROM drive (can be additionally purchased).

The following types of external CD drives exist. Drive Type DVD-ROM DVD-Combo You can read CDs and DVDs, and burn a CD. Function Reads CD/DVD. DVD Super Multi You can read CDs and DVDs, and burn CDs and DVDs. Supported DVD recording types include DVDR, DVDRW, DVD-

RAM. The appearance and color of the external-type CD drive may differ from the actual appearance and color depending on the CD drive model.

rotates at a high speed.

When you clean a CD or DVD title, wipe with a soft cloth from inside to outside.

Do not eject a CD when the CD operating LED is on. Connecting the CD Drive Connect the CD drive to the USB port. USB port 65 Inserting and Ejecting a CD 1 Press the Eject button of the CD drive.

A CD drives reading and writing speed may differ depending on the condition and type of the media.

To eject a CD when the CD drive

off, place the end of a paper clip

(

) into the Emergency Hole until the CD tray is ejected. Status Indicator Emergency Hole Eject Button 2 When the CD tray opens, insert a CD or DVD and push the tray in until it

3 The CD drive status indicator is turned on. 66 Multi Card Slot Using the multi card slot, you can read and write data to a SD card, SDHC card, MMC.

devices such as a digital camera, digital camcorder, MP3, etc.

You have to additionally purchase a multi card with the necessary capacity depending on your requirements.

function is not supported.

Supported Cards SD Card SDHC Card MMC 67 To Insert and Use a Memory Card 1 Insert a card into the slot according to the directions printed on the slot.

Continue Without Scanning. This will proceed to Step 2 above. 3 You can save, move and delete data

drive. Example) SD Card 2 Start > My Computer. The inserted memory card is displayed. The device name of the card drive may differ depending on your computer model. Since you can only use the card after formatting it, if it is not formatted, format the card referring to the descriptions of To format a memory card. 69 68 1 Start > My computer. 2 3 Start to the formatting. touchpad and select Format.

To use a card to exchange data with a digital device such as a digital camera, formatting the data using the digital device is recommended.

When you try to use a card, which is formatted in the computer, in another digital device, you may have to format the card again in the device.

You cannot format, write or delete data from a SD, or SDHC card with a write protection tab when it

Inserting and removing a memory card repeatedly may damage the memory card. Using a Mini SD snd RS-MMC Since the above cards are too small, you cannot insert the cards into the slot directly. Insert the card into the dedicated adapter (available from most electronic retailers) and then insert the adapter into the multi card slot. However, depending on the adapters body material, some RS-MMC cards may not be recognized properly.

the card is recognized correctly prior to purchasing. To remove a memory card 1 remove the card. To format a memory card

time, you must format the card before using it. Formatting a card deletes all data saved on the card. If the card

before formatting it. 69 Connecting a monitor / TV Using an external display device is useful when you are giving a presentation or watching a video or movie through your monitor. You have to buy a connection cable additionally. Connecting to the Monitor / TV Connect the computer to the RGB port of the monitor or TV using a monitor cable (15-

pin). 70 Viewing Through a Monitor / TV

Switching the Display Device using the Shortcut Key Press the Fn +

once. Then the Easy Display Manager screen appears in which you can select a display device. Whenever you press the

holding down the Fn option is changed. Example) Selecting LCD+CRT Dual View

LCD

CRT: External Monitor Screen

LCD+CRT Clone : External Monitor Screen

LCD+CRT DualView: External Monitor Screen in Dual View

What is Dual View?

Dual View is a function that enables you to view a computer screen over two display devices. It is convenient when you need a wide screen. External Monitor / TV is not supported in the DOS Command Prompt window. 71 Using Dual View to View Extended Screen Dual View is a function that enables you to view a computer screen over two display

In Dual View mode, you can select the screen resolution and colour quality for each display device, as if there were two separate graphics cards. 1 Connect the external display device

(e.g. a monitor or a projector) to the corresponding port of the system. To connect a TV, connect the TV to the TV output port of the system. 2 Press touchpad right button on the

Properties, and then

3 2 icon, select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor

Apply. 72 4

Identify on the left side of Troubleshoot. The primary display device(the LCD) is indicated as 1, and the secondary display device is indicated as 2. Now you can view the screen through two monitors. 1 : Primary 2 : Secondary Deactivating Dual View Mode

2 icon, clear the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitorApply. To move a window between display devices in Dual View mode

primary display device (1, the LCD), and drag it to the secondary display device (2). The window is moved to the secondary display device.

When you use Dual View,

'Primary' monitor is recommended.

If the screen of the secondary display device is displayed at 1024x768 pixels, with 32bit colours, change the settings to the desired screen resolution and colour quality in the [Display Properties] dialog box. 73 Adjusting the Volume

Adjusting the Volume using the Keyboard Press the Fn +

Fn +

volume. Press the Fn +

turn the volume on or off.

For advanced volume control options,

Volume icon

, and adjust the volume level in the volume control program. Adjusting the Volume using the Volume Adjustment Program

Volume icon

and slide the volume control bar to adjust the volume. When you turn the system on, a booting noise may occur. Mute 74 What is Auto Volume Control?

Auto Volume Control is a function that maintains the same volume level for all digital sources. The volume level of playing music

the Auto Volume Control function, the volume level will remain the same. However, if the Auto Volume Control function is activated, the volume control function of a multimedia player such as Windows Media Player may

and adjust the volume by sliding the volume bar. in

To disable EDS, select Enhanced Digital Sound OFF from the pop-

up menu. Using EDS Enables listening to surround sound using

To listen to more stereophonic sound,

Start > All Programs > Samsung

> Samsung EDS > Samsung EDS or

EDS icon

from the pop-up menu. To disable EDS, select Enhanced Digital Sound OFF from the pop-up menu. on the 75 Using Recorders This section describes how to perform recording on a computer by using Windows Recorder.

1 Connect a microphone to the 2 Start > Control Panel >

Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices.

Options > Properties. 3 Advanced from Volume and 4 Select Realtek HD Audio input from the mixer device to select Recording from Adjust Volume for. 5 Select Mic in Volume from Show the following volume controls OK. 6 When Recording Control window

recording volume to increase the recording sensitivity and close the window. 7 Start > All Programs >

Accessories > Entertainment >

Sound Recorder. 8 Record button to perform recording. The default recording duration of Windows is 60 seconds. Download a dedicated recording program from the Internet to record audio data for a long time. 76 Chapter 3. Using Microsoft Windows XP About Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Screen Layout Control Panel 78 80 84 The screen shots used in this chapter may differ from actual screens depending on the Windows XP version and model. About Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP (hereinafter referred to as Windows) is the basic operating system for computers.

Tour Windows XP as well as Help and Support to learn about how to use Windows. Tour Windows XP Tour Windows XP introduces the basic features and characteristics of Windows.

Start > Tour Windows XP.

Start > All Programs > Accessories > Tour Windows XP.

The screen layout may differ depending on the computer model and the operating system. Click the title. 78 Help and Support Help and Support allows you to view the features and usage of Windows. Also, it allows

Start > Help and Support. Search Fixing a problem: If a problem occurs, you can get help. How to Change Desktop (Background Picture) What's new in Windows XP > Windows XP articles : Walkthrough ways to use your PCWalkthrough : Personalize your PC, you can view the way to

Customize Desktop. 79 Windows XP Screen Layout Desktop

The screen layout may differ depending on the computer model and the operating system. Shortcut Icons You can launch programs by

shortcut icons

Start Menu The menu from which you can launch programs. Start button Press the start button. The Start menu appears. Recycle Bin You can drop

folders here. Language Bar Switches text input language. Taskbar Currently running programs are displayed here. 80 System Tray with Clock Shows some running program icons. Icons not being used are

hidden icons. Start Menu The menu from which you can launch programs.

Start. The Start menu appears. Alternatively, press the Windows

User account name Items that are pined to the Start menu. Frequently used programs All Programs My Documents folder My Computer Control Panel Help and Support Search Run My Computer Control Panel Help and Support Search Run

Provides on-line help, information on Windows and troubleshooting.

Run programs or documents. 81 Window A window is a basic foundation for operating your computer. For instance, a window of

Start > My Computer. Displayed menus and names may be varied.

Local Disk saved in your computer.

Show Folder Contents. Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Fast Operation Window Minimize button Close button Maximize button Folder Icon Drive Icon (Memory) 82 What is a Drive?

What is a Folder?

What is a File?

data. How to View the Entire Drive Structure

83 Control Panel

settings. Running Control Panel

Start > Control Panel. Appearance and Themes Network and Internet Connections Add or Remove Programs Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices Performance and Maintenance

or screen saver to your computer, or customize the Start

or change modem, phone, and Internet settings. Install or remove programs and Windows components. Change the entire sound scheme or individual sounds

84

Start > Control Panel. Printers and Other Hardware User Accounts Date, Time, Language, and Regional Options Accessibility Options Security Center

camera, and other hardware. Change user account settings, passwords, and pictures. Change the date, time, and time zone for your computer, the language to use, and the way numbers, currencies, dates, and times are displayed. Adjust your computer settings for vision, hearing, and mobility. View your current security status and access important settings to help protect your PC. 85 User Account Windows XP allows to set multiple users with accounts. This section describes how to add a user account and to switch a it. How to Add a User Account 1 Start > Control Panel. 2 User Account and Create a new Account in sequence. 3 Next. 4 Create Account the created account from the User Account window. 5 the user account information. You can change the account name, password, account type, and picture. 86 To Delete User Account 1 Start > Control Panel > User 2 Select the user account to be deleted

Delete Account. Account. The administrator account cannot be deleted. It can only be renamed or disabled. How to Switch a User 1 Start > Logoff. 2 Switch User. 3 from the Welcome screen. Then you can log on with a new user name. 87 Changing Resolution and Color A resolution is the number of pixels displayed on the screen. If you set the resolution to

than the pervious. As color quality gets higher, more colors can be represented. 1 Start > Control Panel >

Appearance and Themes > Change the screen resolution. 2 Settings and change the resolution and color quality. Then,

OK. Move the slider bar to set the resolution. You can select a graphic chip set. Click the pull-down menu button to select the number of colors you want. It is recommended to set the resolution and color quality depending on the LCD type of your computer as the following:

LCD Type WSVGA WSVGA Resolution 1024 x 600 1024 x 576 88 Color Quality Strongest (32-bit) Strongest (32-bit) Chapter 4. Using the Network Wired Network Wireless Network Using Samsung Network Manager

(Optional) Bluetooth (Optional) 90 93 99 109 Wired Network

internet connection at home.

99 1 Connect a LAN cable to the computers LAN port. 4 Select Local Area Connection and

and select Properties. 2 Start > Control Panel >

Network and Internet Connections

> Network Connection. 3 Manage Network Connections from the left pane. The LAN Device name may differ depending on your computers

90 5 General tab and select a LAN driver from Connect using:. Select Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) Properties. The displayed LAN driver may vary depending on the LAN device type.

Install

below: You can add a client, a service, or a protocol. 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically when using DHCP. If you use a static IP, select Use the following IP address and enter the values. If the IP of your computer is not automatically assigned, contact the

7 OK. Now

91

simultaneously Using the providing by Windows XP, you can set

and then you can select to use either of them to connect to the Internet. 1 Start > Control Panel >

Network and Internet Connections

> Network Connection > Local Area Connection by using the right

Properties.

Properties. 2 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) 3 Select the tab, select

4 OK. 92 Wireless Network

without using LAN cables between them. 99

This description is applied only to the models equipped with wireless LAN cards or

Samsung Network Manager as well.

Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System > Hardware Tab >

Device Manager > Network Adapter Some of the pictures shown in this description may vary depending on the wireless LAN device.

Press the Fn +

Once the wireless LAN is enabled, the wirelss LED turns on. Types of Wireless LAN Connections The types of wireless LAN connections are as follows. The following describes how to use the wireless LAN based on AP connections.

AP Connections You can connect to the Internet or a

What is Access Point (AP)?

wired LAN to wireless LAN and corresponds to the wireless hub of a

to connect more than one computer where wireless LAN is enabled. 93

computers where wireless LAN is enabled wirelessly and is called Peer-

to-Peer (or Ad HOC). This method

Then, another computer is connected to the computer wirelessly for communications. For more information on how to establish connections, see the information from Start > Help and Support > Networking and Web. When you use Ad-Hoc, you have to change the McAfee Firewall settings. 185 Connecting to Wireless LAN If an AP exists near your location, you can easily connect to wireless LAN in the method provided by Windows XP.

may vary. 1 Wireless Network Connection icon using the right button of the touch

View Available Wireless Networks.

2 Select an AP to be connected and

Connect.

OK.

3 Once Connected to AP is displayed,

94 To check the network connections Place the mouse on the Wireless Network Connection icon

from the 95 Connecting to computer-to-computer networks

(peer-to-peer or ad hoc)

computers that have wireless LAN modules. Using this method, a computer that is not connected to the Internet can share the Internet by accessing another computer connected to the Internet. (Refer to Sharing Internet Access on page 103.) You can connect by completing the following steps:

Step 1. Setting up a computer-to-

computer network 1 Wireless Network Connection and select View Available Wireless Networks. 2

3 Advanced. 96 4 Clear Automatically connect to

it is selected.Select Computer-to-

5 Add. 6

provided for meautomatically. Enter

from an unauthorized user, it would

consists of 5 ~ 13 alphanumeric characters (e.g. magic), or of 10 ~ 26 hexadecimal numbers (ahexadecimal number is represented by numbers 0 to 9 or letters a to f). 7 name (e.g. samsung) is in the

OK. 97 Step 2. Connecting to the

1 Wireless Network Connection and select View Available Wireless Networks. 3

in Connecting to computer-to-

or ad hoc) on page 96 Connect When connected to the wireless

Connected

Checking the connection status Move the mouse pointer over the

connection status is displayed. 2

Connecting to computer-to-computer

page 80Connect. 98 Using Samsung Network Manager (Optional)

Enabling the movement-free feature. 103

Then, you can select a location and use the computer without giving extra effort for

99~102

103 Enables the feature that allows two computers to share an Internet using one Internet line. Sets one computer as the sharing server and the other computer as the client to use the Internet in both computers.

Easy check-up for the network connection status. 108 Perform Network Settings

1 If you use a wired LAN, connect the

LAN cable to the wired LAN port. Press the Fn +

the wireless LAN features to use wireless LAN. Once the wireless LAN is enabled, the wireless LAN LED turns on. 2 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Network Manager > Samsung Network Manager. 3 Add. 99 4 location and enter the location name

Next. 5 Select Internet Direct Connection

Next. 6

Next. Choose Device Select between wired LAN and wireless LAN. IP Settings

administrator and enter the IP information if the IP is not an automatic IP. Get IP Automatically Select this option and perform automatic IP settings if you use DHCP. 100 7 When the Printer Setting window

Finish. To add a

Add Printer. The Add Printer Wizard appears. Set up theprinter according to the instructions displayed on the screen. When the

Show printer button, select the

Finish button. To not add a printer, select No Default Printer Finish button setting is complete, the Do you want to move to newly added location now? message appears. If you select Yes for the added location are applied.

added location are applied, the added place and the corresponding

is displayed in The detailed Information for window.

an icon for the added location is created within the Saved Locations window. Now you can use the Internet or add a new

Saved Locations Menu Current Place Information 101 Wireless LAN AP Connection Procedures

wireless LAN AP

Wireless Network Connection

View Available Wireless Networks.

Search AP from the Wireless menu to search for wireless LAN APs. Select

Connect button. For

Available AP Connect

administrator.

When the computer is connected to the wireless LAN AP, the Connected message

102 Using the network after moving location

address, printer setting, etc.) for each location, you can immediately access the

setting procedures regardless of your location. when connected to the Internet. 1 2 Select an icon that represents the corresponding location from the Saved Locations window and then

3 selected location are applied, the new

information are displayed in The detailed Information for window. Sharing Internet Access Set one computer as the sharing server and another computer as the client for two computers to share an Internet using

is complete, you can use the Internet immediately. If you perform Internet sharing setup by using Samsung Network Manager, the program must be installed into both computers. There are three methods for setting each computer as a sharing server and a client as shown in the table. This document describes how to do so by giving an example to the typical connection method 1 (Wire+Wireless). Sharing Server (Hereinafter referred to as server) Computer that is equipped with two LANS and is directly connected to an Internet. Sharing Client (Hereinafter referred to as client) Computer that is not directly connected to the Internet and is able to use the Internet through the sharing server. 103 How to Connect the Client to the Server Connection Type Network Device of the Server Connection Device to the Internet Connects to the client. Network Device of the Client Check the connections before connecting to the Internet. Method1 Wired LAN Method2 Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN It is wireless-to-wireless connection. First turn on the wireless LAN. Wired LAN Wired LAN It is wire-to-wire connection. First use the LAN cable to connect two devices before setting the computer. In Method 3, you have to install the wired LAN card for connection. Method3 Wired LAN Wired LAN Wired LAN 3 Select the icon that shows the

location name (for example, Home-

Next. 4 Next. How to Set up Sharing Server

connected before setting up the sharing server. 1 Run Samsung Network Manager on the computer that will be used as the sharing server. 2 Add. 104 7 Next. 8 Add Printer and set up a printer following the instructions in the wizard. Once printer addition is complete,

Refresh. Select the added

Complete. If you dont want to add a printer, just

Complete without following the instructions in the wizard. 9 If the Do you want to move to newly added location now?

No. The added location icon is created and sharing server setup is complete. Set up the sharing client next. When you use Internet Connection Sharing, you have to change the McAfee Firewall settings. 185 5 connected to the external Internet as

Next. Determining whether

IP address setting Select a network device

(for example, wired LAN) 6 Set up the device to be connected to

Next. Because the wireless connection

sharing server must be entered in the client as well, remember them. 105 7 Add Printer and set up a printer following the instructions in the wizard. Once the printer addition is

Refresh.

Finish. If you dont want to add a printer, just

Complete without following the instructions in the wizard. 8 If the Do you want to move to the added location now? window

No. If the icon for the added location appear, it means that the client

Yes, the computer connects to the sharing server and you can immediately use the Internet. How to Set up the Sharing Client This description is discussed based on the wireless connection to the sharing server. The sharing server has to be turned on and the wireless LANs in both computers have to be active. 1 Run Samsung Network Manager on a computer that will function as the sharing client. 2 Add. 3 Select the icon that shows the

Next.

Next. 4 Select Sharing Client (Wireless) and 5 Enter the values in the Wireless Connection Name and Network Key

Next. 6 Next. 106 To connect to the Internet from the Sharing Client 1 because this is mandatory. If you connect to the sharing server through a wireless LAN, the wireless LAN of the server must be turned on. the sharing client computer. 2 Run Samsung Network Manager on 3 been set as the sharing client in the

Once a message appears to inform you that moving is complete, you can use the Internet. If the Internet

Wireless menus > Reconnect Sharing in Samsung Network Manager connected again. 107 Checking Network Status

4 When the diagnosis is complete, out

device status, read the description in the lower part of the window. Reconnect and set up the device according to the diagnosis result. 1 Run Samsung Network Manager. 2 Diagnose Status on the Mngmnt menu. 3 window appears.

Start

XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 108 Bluetooth (Optional) Bluetooth is a wireless communication technology that allows access to devices

connection.

function without a cable connection.

The Bluetooth function is only available between devices supporting Bluetooth

(computers, mobile phones, PDAs, printers, etc.), and the function may be restricted

The Bluetooth function is optional and may not be supported depending on your model.

is not guaranteed. Bluetooth Functions File Transmission Network Access Network Access through a Phone Connection Data Sync

(Synchronization)

phones, PDAs, etc. You can connect to another computer with the Bluetooth function as you access a wireless LAN in Ad-Hoc mode or connect to the Internet through an AP or Internet Connecting Sharing Server. You can connect to the Internet through a Bluetooth mobile phone.

computers, etc. supporting Bluetooth. 109 Electronic Business Card (Vcard) Sound Output HID Connections You can exchange electronic business cards with

supporting Bluetooth. You can listen to audio from the computer through another Bluetooth device or listen to audio of another Bluetooth device through the computer.

supporting Bluetooth. For more information about using the Bluetooth function, see the online help of the Bluetooth Device. For more information about using the Bluetooth function, refer to the online help of the Bluetooth Device. 110 Bluetooth Software Setup Bluetooth software is installed on computers supporting Bluetooth.

1 My Bluetooth Places

icon 2 Next button to start setting up.

In the setting up steps, enter a device name to be displayed in t he Bluetooth Manager program. Enter a name in the Computer NameLaptop for the Computer Type

Also, a step appears for selecting the services to be provided by your Bluetooth device for other Bluetooth devices. At this point, the program automatically detects available services and displays them as selected. It is recommended not to change the default selection. 111 If you change the service settings, the driver necessary for the additionally selected services are installed. At this point, a warning message may appear informing you that there is no Microsoft logo. Since it does not affect the operation, continue the installation. 3 If the driver installation is complete, the next step proceeds which searches for nearby Bluetooth devices. Since you do not have to

Skip

4 If the settings are complete, the My Bluetooth Environment window appears. 112 Using Bluetooth

use other Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth Help Bluetooth Help provides detailed procedures on using Bluetooth functions.

My Bluetooth Settings on the Desktop and press the <F1>

(Help). Exchanging Files between Bluetooth computers

folders between Bluetooth computers are described below. 1

Bluetooth icon

area and select Quick Connection

> File Transmission > Search for Device. Select Start > Help and Support

> Networking and the Web >

Networking > Wireless networking

> Bluetooth devices (wireless) to view Windows Help. 113 2 In the Select Device computer to be connected (hereafter Computer B). 3 When the Bluetooth Security Setting window appears, enter the Bluetooth security code (or Bluetooth PIN) and

Start Pairing. The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code

(for example, same numbers) on

connection. 4 After a short while, the Bluetooth PIN Code required dialog box appears on Computer B, enter the code that you have input in Step 3 above. 5 If the FTP File Access Privilege Request window appears on Computer B Select Access Permission window

OK. 114 6

folders are automatically transmitted. 7 close the File Transmission window.

C:\Documents and Settings\[user name]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange folder. 115 Connecting Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick and Headset devices The procedures to use Bluetooth HID

or a headset, etc. on the computer are described below. The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code

connection. 1 Turn on the Bluetooth function on the device to connect to (mouse,

Some devices have a button to turn on the Bluetooth function, so see the corresponding device manual. Settings icon

2 My Bluetooth 3 If the My Bluetooth Settings window

View devices in range. If the device to connect to appears,

Connecting to the Internet via a Bluetooth mobile phone If you have a Bluetooth mobile phone, you can connect your computer to the Internet without a wired or wireless connection to an Internet service provider.

View devices in range. If the device has not appeared yet, since this menu changes to Search devices in rangeSearch devices in range to show the device. 4 If the Bluetooth PIN Code input window appears, enter a PIN code referring to the manual of the corresponding device. The PIN code for an HID device is generally printed in the manual of the corresponding device. 5 If you enter the PIN code, you can immediately use the device.

Hibernation mode. 116

supports Bluetooth.

To connect to the Internet through the Bluetooth mobile phone, you need the wireless operator account information such as the username, password, dial number and so on. For this information, contact your mobile phone operator. If you connect to the Internet through a Bluetooth mobile phone, the connection tariff may be very expensive. Please use this function only after ascertaining the connection cost or subscribing to a data communications plan that allows you to connect to the Internet directly. 1 My Bluetooth Environment icon

2 When the My Bluetooth Environment Add Bluetooth device. 4 Select your mobile phone from the

Next. The following descriptions use a mobile phone called V740. 3 If the Bluetooth Setup Wizard

Next to start the device search. 117 5 If the Bluetooth Security Setup window appears, enter a Bluetooth security code (Bluetooth PIN) and

Start Pairing. The Bluetooth security code

(Bluetooth PIN) is a password used between two devices connected through Bluetooth. You can enter any number between 4 to 6 alphanumeric characters on the two devices. 6 If the Pairing signal is delivered to the mobile phone, the Bluetooth security code input window appears in the mobile phone screen. Enter the same security code into the mobile phone that you entered in Step 4. For example, if you entered 1234 on your computer, you must also enter 1234 on the mobile phone. 7 In the Select Bluetooth Service window, select the File Transfer and Dialup Networking services and

Finish. 118 10 If the Connect to Bluetooth window appears after a while, enter the Username, Password, and Dial (Dial Number) the Dial button. Then, when the Internet connection is established, you can use the Internet using Internet Explorer.

Depending on the mobile phone model, the service names and supported service types may differ.

If you select only one service, one more Setup Wizard step appears.

Service only, a Bluetooth

cancel and close the window. 8 The Dialup Networking and File Transfer service icons are added to the My Bluetooth Environment window. 9 V740 Dialup Networking in the My Bluetooth Environment window.

enter the phone number in the Dial Number

OK to save the phone number.

currently entered username and password are saved. 119

About the Username, Password, and Dial Number The username, password and dial number used here do not refer to the ones used by the mobile phone user. They refer to the unique username, password and phone number of the mobile phone operator that are required

mobile phone operator about them.

When an AP name is required to connect to the Internet An APN (AP Name) may be required depending on the mobile phone or mobile phone

Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System

> Device Manager > Modem,

Bluetooth Modem, select the Advanced tab and then enter an APN in the format of +CGDCONT=1,IP,APN in the Miscellaneous Initialization Command APN is internet.com). For detailed

phone operator about this.

Disconnecting the Internet connection

V740 Dialup Networking in the My Bluetooth Environment window.

Bluetooth Connection Status window. Alternatively, press the Disconnect button on the mobile phone to disconnect the Internet connection. 120

It is recommended using only one Bluetooth device at a time as connecting multiple Bluetooth or other wireless devices at the same time may slow or destabilize the Bluetooth connection.

Data communications via Bluetooth may be poor when the CPU load is at

system resources.

The Bluetooth function of a Bluetooth PDA, mobile phone, mouse or

them in connection with a Samsung computer supporting Bluetooth, you

the device to connect to is turned on. For the procedures on turning on the Bluetooth function of a device, refer to the relevant device manual.

The services provided by Bluetooth devices may vary depending on their capabilities. For the services provided by the Bluetooth device, refer to the device manual. Stopping a Bluetooth device

Bluetooth icon on the

Stop the Bluetooth device. To use a Bluetooth device after stopping it, select Start Bluetooth device above. Usage Instructions

Generally, Bluetooth devices deliever stable performance while connected within a 3m(10 ft.) distance.

For Bluetooth to operate smoothly, use the computer in an open environment with no walls or obstacles in the way and having low radio interference.

You can connect to only one Bluetooth device at a time for a phone connection, data syncing, electronic business card exchange, FAX transmission/reception, sound related functions, and serial port functions. 121 Chapter 5. Using Applications Introducing Programs Play Camera (Optional) Samsung Update Plus (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) Using Samsung Magic Doctor

(Optional) Reinstalling Software 123 126 128 130 135 136 Introducing Programs Using the software supplied with the Samsung computer, you can easily use functions and troubleshoot problems. Try to use the software after learning about the basic use of the software. For detailed information, refer to the help section of the corresponding software. Every software program may not be provided depending on your computer model. In addition, some pictures may differ from actual product depending on the computer model and software version. 123 Multi Media Functions

Samsung Network Manager

(Optional)

program that enables you to easily

for each location and you can also

99 Samsung Battery Manager

Samsung Battery Manager

(Optional) Samsung Battery Manager is a power Samsung Battery Manager is a power management program that provides easy-to-use power management and power saving settings so that the battery usage time can be extended. 155

Play Camera Using this program, you can directly

(Optional)

computer. 126 Management Functions

Samsung Update Plus Samsung Update Plus is a software

(Optional) function that examines and updates the Samsung software and drivers installed on your Samsung computer to the most recent versions. 128

McAfee SecurityCenter This is a security solution that detects

(Optional) and removes computer viruses and protects the computer from Internet threats. 130 124 Troubleshooting Functions

SAMSUNG Magic Doctor

(Optional) SAMSUNG Magic Doctor is troubleshooting software provided by Samsung Computer for system diagnosis, and restoring the system. The system diagnosis function enables users to diagnose system problems without assistance from others.

Easy Display Manager (Optional) Easy Display Manager is a program that displays the changed setting on the screen when a setting is changed by

changing the display mode through the Display Settings window. Example) The icon that appears when pressing the Fn +

brightness.

Easy SpeedUP Manager (Optional) This program enables you to select operation mode when you need maximum system performance or low-

noise/low power consumption with one-

60 125 Play Camera (Optional)

using the camera installed on the computer.

The program versions described in this manual are subject to change and the screen images and terms in this manual may differ from actual product.

For more information on how to use the program, refer to the online help.

persons privacy. 1 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Play Camera > Play Camera. Preview Window Window Control and Exit Buttons Open Folder Rec Help Snapshot 126

window using the Touchpad, you can set up the camera, resolution, device and save folder. 2 Place an object in front of the camera

Snapshot or Start Recording button. A

recording.

Stop Recording recording is stopped. button. The 3 Open Save Folder button, you can view your stored pictures and videos.

You can view a picture by double-

Since you cannot watch recorded videos using the Play Camera, use a video playing program such as Windows Media Player, etc. to watch videos. 127 Samsung Update Plus (Optional) Samsung Update Plus is software that examines and updates the Samsung software and drivers installed on your Samsung computer to the latest version.

To search for updates and update your computer using Samsung Update Plus, your computer must be connected to the Internet.

The update search result may differ depending on your computer model. Samsung Update Plus does not provide updates for applications installed after purchasing the computer. 2 Search for and Install Updates

Search for New Updates. To update the software and drivers 1 Select Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Update Plus

> Samsung Update Plus.

the program, a window will appear

agreement in the window.

Agree to use this software. 128 3 If there are available software or driver updates for your computer, the available updates will be listed. Select the required updates from the list

Install Update to start the update. (The update list on the screen may differ depending on the computer model.) Updates that must be installed separately. If you select Install as an update item that must be installed separately, a message appears informing you of this. Follow the instruction message to correctly install it. Automatic update items display By default, your computer is

for updates. If there is a new update

latest available updates. 129 McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (a virus/spyware detection and protection software that includes

from various Internet threats as well as detecting and removing viruses.

For more detailed information on the program, refer to the McAfee help.

You can register McAfee when connected to the Internet.

McAfee software is optional. It may not be supplied for some models or it may be supplied through the McAfee installation icon. When the installation icon is provided, you have to install the program referring to the Installing McAfee section.

A different anti-virus program may be provided depending on the computer model. Installing McAfee For some models, an Install McAfee Web Essentials In this case, you can install the McAfee software according to the following procedures and then use the McAfee software. For some models, a McAfee Security Center icon the software is already installed, the installation step is not required.

Install McAfee Web

Essentials icon

The Chain Installer window opens and the installation begins automatically. Please wait for a moment.

When the installation is complete, the Chain Installer window disappears. 130 Using McAfee To use McAfee, user registration is required. If a user is not registered, even though virus inspection is supported, your PC will not be completely protected because the virus information will not be updated with the latest information. The procedures to inspect and heal viruses after the user registration will be described below. User Registration 1 The Program Setup screen appears

Next. If the Program Setup screen does

McAfee icon

then select Product Setup from the pop-up menu. 3 The Create New McAfee Account item appears.

Next. The Program Setup Completed window appears. If you have already registered with

Login and enter the registered email address and password to login. The Program Setup Completed window appears. 2 The End User License Agreement appears.

Accept. 131 Inspecting and Healing Viruses

by a virus and to heal viruses found by McAfee are described below. 3 View Results. The viruses are listed. Since the corresponding viruses have already been removed, you can use your computer without any concern.

For possible virus infections

(where it is not completely certain), the Detected message appears. In this case, the items will be maintained or deleted depending on your decision.

To deal with new viruses,

McAfeeSecurityCenter up to date. In general, it is automatically updated when connected to the Internet. Alternatively, you can

Update to the Internet. after connecting

> McAfeeSecurityCenter. 1 Start > All Programs > McAfee 2 Scan button on the left side of the program. The Scan begins. At this time, if a virus is found, it is immediately healed during the inspection. 132

for the product when purchasing the product in order to protect the computer

activated, you may not connect to the

case, you have to change the settings as follows. Method 1) When you need to select Allow Access in the Server or Internet Access Request window.

request window appears. In this case, select Allow Access in the window

OK. Then you can install the program normally or open the page. 133 Method 2) When you need to deactivate the Firewall If you cannot connect to the Internet when using a broadband Internet service, you can connect to the Internal normally if you disable the McAfee Firewall. However, since it may cause a security problem, be careful when doing so.

McAfee Security Center

Advanced menu at the

Internet&Network.

Turn the Internet&Network at the right to Off, set the Select when to

to Never and then

OK.

Home in the left menu pane

Ignore next to the Firewall protection is disabled message. It is recommended activating the Windows Firewall for your computer's safety when you have disabled the McAfee Firewall. To

Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall > Change Settings >

On(recommended). 134 Using Samsung Magic Doctor (Optional) Magic Doctor is troubleshooting software provided by Samsung Computer. A user can

The screens used in this manual may differ from actual screens according to the program version. 3 When the system status diagnostics are complete, the diagnostics result appears. Diagnosing the System 1 Select Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Magic Doctor

> Samsung Magic Doctor. 2

Cure for Samsung Magic Doctor to cure the problem. The system status diagnostics start. 135 Reinstalling Software If you have reinstalled the Windows operating system, or the system and program do not operate properly, you can re-install the driver and program using the system software Media.

using the Add or Remove Programs of the Control Panel and reinstalling the software using the System Software Media. The System Software Media is supplied as a CD or DVD depending on your computer model.

To use the System Software Media, the external USB ODD must be connected to the computer. The following descriptions presuppose that the external USB ODD is connected. Running the system software Media This displays a list of drivers or programs that are not currently installed on your computer from the system software Media provided.All necessary components are installed using the factory defaults. This displays the components (driver, Windows programs,etc) that, if not installed, may cause problems with the system performance.You can install only required components. You can customize the installation of drivers and programs. Standard Installation Minimum Installation Custom Installation 136 3 The Software installations was completed window appears.

Yes, the computer is restarted. Installing drivers and programs 1 Select Standard Installation in the System Software Media main screen. 2 If the Start Standard Installation

Yes button. The drivers and programs, which were installed in the computer when you purchased the computer, are installed again. 4 When done, restart the system. 137 Chapter 6. Settings and Upgrade LCD Brightness Control BIOS Setup Setting a Boot Password Changing the Boot Priority Upgrading Memory Battery Using the Security Lock Port 139 141 145 148 149 151 158 LCD Brightness Control You can adjust the LCD brightness in 8 levels. Adjusting LCD Brightness Using Keyboard Press the Fn+

the brightness of LCD. The LCD brightness has eight levels of degree. By pressing the Fn+

brighter by one level of degree.

, the LCD gets or Fn+

to adjust

(for example, in Customized mode) In this mode, you can change the brightness and device setting details. Adjusting LCD Brightness Using Samsung Battery Manager Appropriate LCD brightness is set for each mode in Samsung Battery Manager. In user settings mode, you can select the brightness level.

Start > All Programs > Samsung

> Samsung Battery Manager >

Samsung Battery Manager.

LCD Brightness The LCD brightness settings for maximum battery mode, general mode, and maximum performance mode in Samsung Battery Manager are not maintained when your computer reboots. Only the LCD brightness setting in the user settings mode is maintained once you reboot the computer. For information on the other features of Samsung Battery Manager, see the description on batteries. 147 To Maintain the Changed LCD Brightness After Reboot

maintain the LCD brightness set

Samsung Battery Manager.

Turn on the computer. If the SAMSUNG logo appears, press the F2

Change the value of Brightness Mode Control on the Boot menu to User Control.

Press the F10 change and complete setup. How to Reduce Battery Consumption Adjust the screen brightness to a

battery mode in Samsung Battery Manager to reduce battery consumption. Bad pixels of an LCD The LCD may have less than 4 bad pixels but it does not affect the computer performance. This product may have bad pixels of the same level as the products made by other companies. Caution for Cleaning up LCD Wipe the LCD from the center to the

a computer-dedicated detergent. If

damage. 140 BIOS Setup

needs.

new device.

The functions of the BIOS setup are subject to change for product function enhancement purposes. The BIOS Setup menus and items may differ depending on your computer model. Entering the BIOS Setup 1 Turn the computer on. 2 When the booting screen (SAMSUNG logo) appears, press the F2 enter the BIOS Setup.

screen(SAMSUNG logo) appears, the system will try to boot from the

3 After a moment, the BIOS setup screen appears. The items in the BIOS setup may differ depending on the product. Setup Menu Help Help for the selected item appears automatically. Setup Items 142 The BIOS Setup Screen Menu Main Used to change the basic system and environment settings. Description Advanced and chipsets. Security Boot Exit

Used to set the boot priority and other boot options Used to exit the Setup either saving the changes or not. 143 System Setup Keys

F1 Up & Down Keys F5/F6 F9 ESC Left & Right Keys Enter F10 Press to view the Setup Help. Press to move up and down. Press to change the item value. Press to load the default Setup settings. Press to return to a higher level menu or to move to the Exit menu. Press to move to another menu. Press to select an item or to enter a sub menu. Press to save the changes and exit Setup. 144 Setting a Boot Password When setting a password, you have to enter a password to use the computer or enter the BIOS Setup.

Do not lose or forget your password. If you have forgotten your password, contact a Samsung service center. In this case, a service fee will be charged. Setting a Supervisor Password A Supervisor Password is required to turn the computer on or to start the System Setup. When setting a Supervisor Password, users other than a supervisor cannot use the computer. Setup. 1 Select the Security menu in the BIOS 2 In the Set Supervisor Password item, press <Enter>.

3 Enter a password, press <Enter>, re-

and press <Enter> again. The password can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not allowed. 4

the Setup Notice window, press

<Enter>. The supervisor password has been set. The supervisor password is required to turn the computer on or to enter the BIOS Setup. Setting a User Password The User Password restricts access

However, the Setup items that can

Password.

supervisor password must have been

password also deactivates the user password. In the Set User Password item, press

<Enter> and complete the procedures from Step 3 of Setting a Supervisor Password. Setting Up a Boot Password To setup a boot password, the administrator password (Set Supervisor Password) should be set in advance. Set the Password on boot item to Enabled. Once a boot password is set, you have to enter a password to boot up the computer. 146 Setting up a Hard Disk Drive Password (Optional) A supervisor password must be set using the Set Supervisor Password menu.

drive, it cannot be accessed from another computer. Press <Enter> in the Set HDD Password described in Step 3 of the Setting up the Supervisor Password. Deactivating the Password 1 Press <Enter> on the password to be deactivated. For example, to deactivate a supervisor password in the Set Supervisor Password item, press <Enter>. 2 In the Enter Current Password

password and press <Enter>.

Enter>. 3 Leave the Enter New Password item 4 Leave the 5 In the Setup Notice window, press

Enter>.

<Enter>. The password is deactivated.

function is not provided for some models. Changing the hard disk drive password For security purposes, you can only

after restarting the computer by pressing the computer Power button. If you cannot change the hard

HDD Password Frozen message appears when entering the BIOS Setup and then selecting Security > HDD Password, press the Power button to turn the computer on again. 147 Changing the Boot Priority

This chapter describes how to change the boot priority so that the computer boots from

1 Select the Boot menu in the BIOS Setup. 3 IDE HDD itemand press the F6 move up to the top item. 2 Press <Enter> on the Boot Device Priority item. 4 Press the F10 and exit Setup. The highest boot priority device is now set to the Hard Drive.

Upgrading Memory A memory is installed in the memory slot at the bottom of this computer. The procedures to replace the memory are described below.

Replace new memory only after shutting the computer down completely. Do not replace memory when the computer is in Sleep mode.

Disconnect mains power and remove the battery before continuing.

Replacing the Memory 1 Remove the screw on the memory compartment cover at the bottom of the computer using a screw driver. 2 Pull the memory module latches outward.The memory module will pop up. Remove the memory module out at an angle of 30 degrees. Fixing Screw

3 Insert a new memory module into the memory slot at an angle of approximately 30 degrees aligning it to the angle of the memory slot. 4 Push the memory module down

memory module down while pulling the memory module latches outward. Memory Slot 5 Close the memory compartment cover and fasten the screw. 150 Battery Please refer to the following instructions when running the computer on battery power without connecting the AC power. A Lithium-Ion smart battery is supplied with this computer. Carefully read and follow the precautions printed on the battery before using the battery. Precautions

Carefully read and follow the precautions printed on the battery and the safety instructions in the User Manual before using the battery. Please refer to the system operation environment ( 193) of this manual and operate and store the battery at room temperature. Installing/Removing the Battery 1 Shutdown the system, close the LCD panel and place the computer upside down on

2 Slide the right battery latch to the OPEN position and remove the battery while holding the left battery latch to the OPEN position. 3 To install the battery again, slide the battery into the system.

the CLOSE (inside) position so that

If the right battery latch is not in the CLOSE (inside) position, there is a danger of data loss because the battery may become separated.

hidden.

moved inwards. 152 Charging the Battery 1 Attach the battery and connect the

computer. The battery will then start charging. 2 When charging is complete, the Charge LED turns green. Status Charging Charging complete AC adapter not connected Charge LED Amber Green Off 153 Measuring the Remaining Battery Charge You can view the battery charge status by completing the following procedures. Battery Usage Time Information A battery is an expendable supply, so when using it over a long time, the capacity/battery life is shortened. If the battery life is reduced to under half of its initial time, we recommend purchasing a new battery. For long periods of not using the battery,

extends the battery life time.

To use the shortcut key to view Press the Fn +

The remaining battery charge (%) will displayed for a moment. You can only view the charge status in this way when Easy Display Manager is installed on your computer. Battery Warning

You will hear an alarm when the remaining battery charge reaches below 10%. In this case, connect the AC adapter or turn off the computer and install a fully charged battery.

If the battery residual amount is 3~5%, the computer automatically shuts down after saving the data. The battery residual amount may vary depending on the computer model. 154 Extending the Battery Usage Time Decreasing the LCD Brightness Press the Fn +

to decrease the LCD brightness to extend the battery usage time. Using Samsung Battery Manager Battery Manager is a management program that allows you to use the battery

power mode depending on the system environment.

Start > All Programs > Samsung

> Samsung Battery Manager >

Samsung Battery Manager. 155 Select Power Mode Power-saving Effect Maximum Battery Mode This mode is appropriate for the environment that requires maximum battery lifetime. The system performance may be degraded in this mode. General Mode This mode is appropriate for the regular environment and it optimizes the performance of the system and battery. Maximum Performance Mode This mode is appropriate for the environment that requires maximum system performance. The battery life may get shorter in this mode. User Settings Mode

detailed settings. You can set LCD brightness, power status, and color quality. What is the Power-saving Effect?

This product displays the battery life in each power mode. The higher the power saving effect increases, the longer the graph bar is displayed. When Using Games or Multimedia The system may not operate properly in maximum battery mode. It is recommended to connect the AC adapter to the system or to use the system in general mode. Usage Mode of Samsung Battery Manager

The maximum battery mode optimizes the system operation speed to increase the battery run time, so the program execution time may get longer.

If you change the power settings, the properties in Power Options window will also be changed.

Complete, install Samsung Battery Manager using the System Software Media in order to use the general mode. Disabling Unused Devices If you turn off unused devices, battery lifetime will improve. 1 Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Systems >

Hardware tab. 2 not using and select Disable. 156 3 Move to the Boot > Smart Battery Calibration item using the direction

Enter>. Using the Battery Calibration Function When charging/discharging the battery repeatedly for a short time only, the battery usage time may be reduced by the difference between the actual battery charge and the remaining charge display. In this case, the actual battery charge and the remaining charge display will be the same by discharging the battery completely using the Battery Calibration function, and then recharging it again. after turning off the computer. 1 Disconnect the AC power adapter 2 Restart your computer and press the F2 button when the Samsung logo appears, to start the BIOS Setup. 4 Highlight Yes in the Battery

window and press <Enter>. The Battery Calibration function is activated and the battery is forcefully discharged. To stop the operation, press the <Esc> button. This operation requires 3~5 hours depending on the battery capacity and the remaining battery charge. 157 Using the Security Lock Port

being stolen when you have to use the computer in a public place.

Chapter 7. Appendix Reinstalling Windows XP Using Samsung Recovery Solution

(Optional) Questions and Answers

Glossary Index Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE 160 165 174

3 204 208 209 Reinstalling Windows XP You can reinstall Windows using the System Recovery CD when Windows does not

A System Recovery CD may not be supplied depending on your computer model.

To reinstall Windows when Windows does not boot, refer to page

To reinstall Windows using System Recovery Media, an external-type ODD must be connected before turning the computer on. The following descriptions assume that an external ODD is connected. 163.

liable for any loss of data. Reinstalling Windows Explain Standard installation option as a standard. the CD-ROM drive. 1 Insert the system recovery CD into 2 Standard Installation.

Standard installation You can change the settings for partitioning, the installation folder, etc. during the Windows installation. However, reinstalling Windows may

to minimize damage from data loss,

data.

Quick Installation This re-installs Windows with the user

intact. The user data in the already existing Windows folders may be preserved as the existing Windows folders are overwritten. 160 3 The description for the standard

Yes. The installation starts, and the system will be restarted after a while.

Setup proceeds with Step 3 before automatically installing Windows.

existing Windows version, so that drivers or applications do not need to be reinstalled. 4 After the system has restarted, the

at this time. After a while the partition

change the partition, press Enter.

one or several partitions. Note that changing the partition deletes all of

5 Select the folder to install the Windows operating system. To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press L on

If you press ESC to select another folder for the installation, new Windows folders are created causing

6 After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows installation, restart the system, and the message Press any

do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation. OptionsNext. 7 When the Regional and Language 8 When a window that requires your name and organization pops up, enter your name and the organization and

Next. 9 When the Date and Time Settings

Next. Setup will continue. 161 10 When the system restarts to display

this means that the installation process is completed. Remove the system recovery CD and install the device drivers and applications from the system software Media. 162 Reinstalling when Windows does not start When Windows does not start, boot up with the System Recovery CD and from there you can reinstall Windows. 1 Insert the system recovery CD into the CD-ROM drive and start the computer. 2 If the following message appears on

Press any key to boot from CD..... 3 time. After a while the partition

change the partition, press Enter. 4

press Enter. 5 Select the folder to install the Windows operating system. To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press L on

6 After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows installation, restart the system, and the message Press any

do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation. 7 Follow the instructions of the Windows XP installation wizard to continue with the installation. 163 8 When the installation is complete, the computer will restart. When the system has restarted, the Press

appears. Ignore the message. The system boots and the Windows and Windows Registration screen appears. Register Windows, following

installation. Remove the System Recovery CD and install the device drivers and application programs using Standard Installation from the System Software Media. 164 Using Samsung Recovery Solution (Optional) Samsung Recovery Solution provides a Restore Function that enables you to easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state when a problem occurs with your computer, as well as a Backup Function that enables you to easily save your computers current status and your data.

Samsung Recovery Solution may not be provided or the version may differ depending on your computer model and the usage procedures may differ depending on the version. The screen images in this document may differ from actual ones.

provided.

connected. The following descriptions assume that an external ODD is connected. Samsung Recovery Solution Functions

Restore Function Using this function, you can easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state without using the System Recovery Media or the Windows Installation CD, when your

165 Basic Restore

restores major

Windows) without touching the user

data on the C drive. Restore Functions Complete Restore This function deletes the entire C drive and then restores the contents of the C drive completely.

Initial Status Restore This function restores the computer to the initial status saved when the computer

purchased.

function restores the computer to the point where the user performed a Complete Backup. Data Restore This function restores the user data if the user

data.

Backup Function

another hard disk drive or DVD Backup Functions Initial Status Backup

the initial status of the computer. Data Backup

Complete Backup

the entire drive C. 166 Using Samsung Recovery Solution Not only can you use Samsung Recovery Solution when Windows is running, but also when you are unable to boot up into Windows. Lets learn how to use Samsung Recovery Solution. Initial Status Backup

is performed after registering Windows. This function saves an image of the Initial Status of the C drive to a secure location so that users can restore the computer to the Initial Status using the Complete

is only performed once immediately after the computer is purchased. 1 time, the Register Windows screen appears. If you register Windows according to the instructions on the screen, the computer will be restarted. 2 When the computer has been restarted, the User Registration

OK. The computer will restart. 3 The Initial Status Backup screen appears.

Advanced accordingly. Adjust the partition size

Next.

available when the computer is

not be available afterwards. Once you have completed the partitions, you cannot resize the partitions.

4

C drive to a secure location. This

Complete Restore function that restores your computer to the initial status when the computer is not

5 complete, restart Windows. 167 Quick Restore

restore your computer to a previous, normal state when a problem occurs with

Basic Restore and Complete Restore

(Computer Initial Status Restore) options. 1 When Windows is running:

Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When Windows does not start:

Turn the computer on and press the F4

(SAMSUNG logo) appears. After a moment, the computer boots up in Restoration mode and the Samsung Recovery Solution screen appears. The touch screen function is not supported in this mode even if your model supports a touch screen. In this mode, please use the touchpad or mouse instead of the touch screen. 168 2 If the Samsung Recovery Solution

after purchasing the computer, the license agreement screen appears before the restoration is started. Read

Agree to continue. 3 If the initial menu screen appears,

Restore.

Select by Symptom, the Select by Symptom menu appears. If you select a symptom, a recommended restoration option will

continue. 4 Select either Basic Restore or Complete Restore from the Restore menu.

A Basic Restore restores the major

C drive in a short time.

A Complete Restore deletes the entire C drive and then restores the contents of the C drive. 6 When the Restart the System message appears after the restoration

OK to restart the system.

connected while the restoration is in

boots up after a Complete Restore has been performed, the speed of the boot process may be slowed down due to the system optimization process. At this time, do not shut the computer down by force. User Complete Backup/Restore A Complete Backup saves the complete image of the C drive onto another drive or DVD. A Complete Restore restores the

onto the C drive. This guide describes the

and restoring by using DVD. Run Complete Restore if the

Basic Restore has been completed. 4-1 If you have selected Basic Restore:

the Next button. The system will be restarted. 4-2 If you have selected Complete Restore:

In the restoration point selection screen, select the restoration point described as Computer Initial

Next button. The system will be restarted. Since a Complete Restore deletes all user data as well as additionally

Complete Restore. 5 The computer boots up into restoration mode and the restoration progress message appears. If you

OK, the restoration begins. The

please wait for a moment. 169

Complete Backup

using a DVD, you can restore the computer even when a problem

the restoration area is removed.

onto DVD, an external ODD that supports DVD burning must be connected. 1 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the

restoration mode.

Backup. 2 When the initial menu screen 3 Complete Backup in the

4 regarding the current computer status

easily recognize it later, and specify the Save Path. If your computer has a DVD-Writer, you can specify the DVD drive as the Save Path. Select Drive D. Select the DVD drive. 5 Next button, the system restarts in restoration mode and the Complete Backup begins. If you have selected the DVD drive

DVD message appears. Insert a

OK button. Samsung Recovery Solution supports DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+RW, and DVD-RW, but does not support CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-DL

(Dual Layer), HD-DVD, and Blu-Ray. 170 6 If multiple DVDs are required, the expected number of DVDs is displayed in the progress screen. Whenever burning a DVD is completed, the Insert the next DVD message will appear. Continue the

7 When the Restart the System message

OK to restart the system.

Complete Restore 1 When backing up onto DVD Turn the computer on and insert the

When backing up to another drive Proceed to Step 2. 2 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the

restoration mode. 3 When the initial menu screen

Restore Complete Restore. 4 Select a Complete Backup restoration point in the restoration

Next button. The system is restarted. 5 The restoration progress message appears after the computer boots up

OK, the restoration begins. If multiple DVDs have been used

burning a DVD is completed, the Insert the next DVD message will appear. 6 When the Restart the System message appears after the restoration

OK to restart the system. The Complete Restore has been completed. 171 4 the Description easily recognize it later and specify the Save Path. If your computer has a DVD-Writer, you can specify the DVD drive as the Save Path.

Save Path, the SamsungRecovery\

SamsungData folder is created on

and the data is saved to the folder.

5 Next button, the Data

the DVD drive as the Save Path,

the OK button. 6 appears. User Data Backup/Restore Data Backup enables you to save

or DVD. Data Restore enables you to restore data using the data saved by

and restoring by using DVD.

Data Backup 1 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the

restoration mode. 2 When the initial menu screen

Backup Data Backup. 3 In the data selection screen, select either Basic Selection or Select from all

Next button. 172 6 When Data Restore is completed,

Data Restore 1 When backing up onto DVD Turn the computer on and insert the

When backing up to another drive Proceed to Step 2. 2 Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the

restoration mode. 3 When the initial menu screen

Restore Data Restore. 4

Next button. 5 Select a folder for the restoration and

Next button. Data Restore begins. 173 Questions and Answers This section provides information on possible problems, solutions and other references for system use. Display Related

The LCD screen is too dark or too A bright. the screen brightness. Press Fn +

press Fn +

screen brightness.

, Fn +

to adjust the viewing during Media Player or

The screen saver disturbs screen A Tools > Options > Player and then clear the Allow screen saver during playback in the Media Center Windows Related

The system does not shutdown properly. A When the system does not shutdown normally, press and hold the Power button until the system manually shuts off. If the Power-Saving Mode

Power button, press and hold for more than 4 seconds to shut the system off. When the system is turned on after such

The system freezes during program operation. A1 There is an error with the program currently being used. Press the

<Ctrl>, <Alt>, and <Delete>

End Task in the Windows Task Manager window. A2 There is an error with the Windows OS. Reboot the system by using the Power button. 174

Switching the MS-DOS command prompt to full screen mode or Windows mode by pressing the

<Alt>+<Enter> keys does not operate properly. A Pressing the <Alt>+<Enter>

this case, the MS-DOS command prompt is repeatedly switched to full screen and then to Windows several times. Please press the

<Alt>+<Enter> press the <Alt>+<Enter>

The shortcut icons are not displayed on the screen even if I press the shortcut key. A The shortcut icons only appear when the Easy Display Manager program is installed.

When I connect a projector, and change the setting to display screen image on both the LCD and the projector by pressing Fn

+

properly. keys, screen is not displayed A Press Fn +

same problem continues, it means the projector cannot support the resolution. Lower the resolution to 800 x 600.

The Taskbar on the bottom of the screen does not appear when a projector is used as the display device. A This may happen, if the projector does not support LCD resolution. In this case change the resolution to 800 x 600 (recommended) on your computer. 175 picture is displayed on the connected monitor (or projector).

The color is strange when the A connection and reconnect the cable. Sound Related

How to install and uninstall the sound driver. A To install or uninstall the sound driver from this system, please follow the procedures below.

Sound Driver Components The sound driver consists of the following 3 components and the 3 components are automatically installed during the installation.

:

Microsoft UAA Bus Driver for High

Driver Samsung EDS

Uninstalling the Sound Driver To remove the sound driver due to a problem or for an update, follow the procedures below. If you do not follow the sequence below, the sound driver may not be removed or the reinstalled driver, or

Select Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. 176

Remove Samsung EDS

Remove Audio Driver and restart the computer. Do not remove the Audio item. Removing this item also removes the modem device driver. If you have removed this item, you need to install the modem device driver again.

Reinstalling the Sound Driver If there is an already installed sound driver, uninstall the driver according to the procedures above. The sound driver is included on the System Software Media.

Insert the System Software CD-

ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Select Sound Driver on either Standard Installation or Custom Installation, then the 3 components of the sound driver are automatically installed.

Installing the Sound Driver after a Windows XP Reinstallation If you install the sound driver after reinstalling Windows XP, the Add Hardware Wizard (Modem Device) window may appear during the sound driver installation. This happens because the High

which has been installed on your system, has changed the settings to search for both sound and modem devices. If you install the modem device, this message will not appear. If necessary, install the modem device together.

Microsoft web site. 177

Double-click the icon in the Taskbar and click on .

.

Select .

Click

.

Click tab.

Unselect and

and Click OK.

Double-click the icon from the Taskbar and select

from the menu.

.

Select .

Click

.

Click tab.

Select and

and Click OK. Using option keeps Microphone Volume muted in the Playback Mixer. 178

I cannot hear my voice through the built-in microphone. A This is because the setting is

muted to reduce the howling sound effect. You can use the microphone recording function normally, even in this state. When using an external microphone, if you disable the microphone channel mute function of the play mixer, you can hear the sound input into the external microphone through the

I have a trouble with recording after selecting Acoustic Echo Cancellation and unselecting Mute in the Microphone volume of the Playback Mixer. A This is because the sound from external microphone is muted by the Acoustic Echo Cancellation Algorithm considering the sound as a Acoustic Echo while the recording and

time. In this case, select Mute in the

Mixer after selecting Acoustic Echo Cancellation item. 179

mode even though there is no received signal, use the system

function.

- The LAN LED may not be turned off if System is shutdown without disabling

- Connecting a wired LAN while using a wireless LAN may not activate the

Wireless LAN to Disable to use the

- When the computer exits standby/

hibernate mode a message informing 10Mbps wired LAN connection may appear. It is because restoring the

100Mbps. Wired LAN Related

<Wake On LAN> function A activates the system from Sleep mode when a signal (such as a ping or

S3 WOL (Wake On LAN)

Select Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance

> System > Hardware > Device Manager > Network Adapters.

Generic Marvell Yukon 88E8040 PCI-E Fast Ethernet Controller item. The above driver name may be different.

From Power management tab, select Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby OK. Restart the system. 180

To use the wireless LAN settings using Windows:

A Start > Control Panel

> Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections > Wireless LAN Connection if the Windows manages wireless

selected in the Wireless Network tab of the Properties window. If not, select the option. Performance and Maintenance >

Administrative Tools > Computer ManagementServices and Applications > Services.

Automatic and the Status is Started.

Start > Control Panel >

Wireless LAN Related

Check the Wireless LAN LED. A If off, press the Wireless LAN On/Off button <Fn>+<F9> to turn it on.

Reinstall the driver. A Reinstall the driver using the software media.

Check the Wireless Zero

A wireless connection message appears while searching for wireless

other than Windows is set to manage the wireless LAN settings. 181

Check the authentication type. A A connection may be disconnected after a period of time if the Use

option is selected when IEEE 802.1x authentication is not being used. View the properties of the corresponding AP in the Wireless

Authentication tab, unselect the Use IEEE 802.1x authentication in this

For detailed information on the

Check the AP settings. A1 appropriate for a wireless LAN. A wireless LAN connection may be limited by the surrounding environment and distance. Obstacles such as walls and door mats affect the quality of the wireless LAN signal. You have to install an AP in a high, open position far away from any other radio signal sources.

(The wireless connection is disconnected frequently.)

I cannot connect to an AP.

Check the Network Key. A Wireless Network Connections icon from the Taskbar

View available wireless networks found, it indicates that the device is

settings may have a problem. Please

Network Key (Encryption Key) and the AP settings.

Check if there is a device nearby using the same frequency band. A1 If there is a device nearby using the same frequency band such as another wireless LAN device, wireless video transceiver, microwave oven, plasma bulb, etc., channel interference may occur. If you experience interference from another device, it is recommended changing the AP channel. A2 When operating in EEE802.11g mode, if there is a IEEE802.11b device operating nearby, you may experience low data rates or even disconnection as it operates in Hybrid mode. 182 If the AP is excessively far away, or is installed at the end of a building and you are attempting to use the wireless LAN from the other end, you may not be able to use the wireless communication normally because

between you and the AP (such as a wall). A2 the AP is not operating properly, turn it off and on again and try again. A3 version. (For more information on the

or your product provider.) A4

cable from the AP to a computer and

properly. A5 Network Key (Encryption Key) settings again. If the automatic password converting function

(passphrase function) is enabled and the wireless connection is normal but you cannot send data over the connection, please enter the Network Key (Encryption Key) manually. A6 If there are multiple APs running at

setting of each AP. If the interval between the channels of the APs is narrow, you may experience electromagnetic interference. Set the channel numbers of the APs so that the internals between the channels are maximized. (for example, Ch1, Ch5, Ch9, Ch13) computer. It is recommended unselecting the Hide option of the AP. SSID (Service Set ID) is a name used to distinguish a wireless LAN from other wireless LANs. It is recommended using Long Preamble. Preamble is a signal for data transmission synchronization. Although some APs support Short Preamble, there might be a compatibility problem. Because Fixed channel selection is more stable then Auto channel selection, Fixed channel selection is recommended. It is recommended

name is Any or Blank, it may cause a compatibility problem. 183 For more information on the AP settings, see the owners manual supplied with the AP. established, I cannot connect to the Internet.

Although a connection has been

Check the TCP/IP settings. A If you cannot connect to the Internet but you are connected to an AP,

When you are not connected to an

the icon, the Search for Wireless Connections window appears.

referring to the descriptions of Connecting to a Wireless LAN in

When you are connected to an AP, an

in the

allocated on the Support tab. If the IP address is not properly allocated, the IP address will be displayed as

follows; (for example, 169.254.xxx. xxx).

DHCP, you have to manually

supports DHCP, the Internet connection may not be available if the DHCP server fails to allocate an IP address to your computer.

wireless connections with the same IP address, but the network connections do not work properly. A You cannot use the same IP address for wired and wireless connections. To use only one IP address for both wired and wireless connections, you must disable one of them according

Connections in the Control Panel. 184

After installing the Wireless LAN Setting program, the AEGIS Protocol (IEEE 802.1x) protocol appears in the [Local Area Connect Properties] window. PROSet, I cannot manage my wireless network in Windows.

(For Intel PROSet) After installing A Use Microsoft Client A The protocol is a security authentication protocol that is automatically installed when the Wireless LAN Settings program is installed and does not affect the program operation. in the Tools menu of the PROSet,

Windows. Thereafter, if you wish to manage your

Activate Intel PROSet/Wireless in the Tools menu of the PROSet.

(For Intel PROSet) Although I have turned the wireless LAN off using the Turn Off Wireless LAN button in PROSet, the Wireless LAN LED is still on. A This is normal. The Turn Off Wireless LAN button in PROSet just turns off the wireless LAN software. The wireless LAN hardware is not affected by this operation. 185

Internet Connection or File Sharing doesnt work, when I use Internet Connection Sharing or Ad Hoc. A You have to register the IP address allocated for Internet Connection Sharing or Ad Hoc as a Trusted IP in McAfee SecurityCenter.

McAfee SecurityCenter >

Internet and Network > Advanced

> Trusted and Banned IPs, and register the IP address or IP address range as a Trusted IP address. The IP address range for DHCP is 10.0.0.1 ~

While playing a game, pressing the Fn +

screen is not properly displayed. keys does not work or the A Some games and 3D application programs may change the display device control. Therefore, pressing the Fn +

running program or may display an abnormal screen. Press the Fn +

launching a program and do not press them while running the program.

Running speed of a game is too slow or fast. A Change the setting of Power

Schemes to Always On.

Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance >

Power Options > Power Schemes

Games and Programs Related

3D game is not executed, or some functions are not working. A Change the graphic setting of the game to 2D or Software Renderer, then execute the program again.

I launched a game right after installing it, and the game is not executed. A This problem may occur when the game is not compatible with Windows XP. Launch the game again, and it will be executed properly.

Fn +

work. Key combination does not A While displaying video of VCD or MPEG, or the display setting is Dual View, you cannot toggle display devices. Also the installation of NetWare Client 32 program disables the function of Fn +

. 186

Some part of a game image is not displayed or is displayed in black. A This may happen when running a game designed for DirecX 8.1 or which has 1024 x 768 as the default resolution, such as NHL 2003, MVP Baseball 2003, Special Forces, Hangame, Pmang etc.

The picture is not displayed properly for some games. A Some games may not display the picture properly when the screen resolution is set to 1024 600 and the color quality is set to 32 bit. For these games, set the screen resolution to 1024 x 600 or 800 x 600, and the color quality to 16bit.

Game play is not displayed smoothly on the screen. A For 3D games, the texture data for the 3D screen display is saved to the system memory. If there is

is saved to the hard disk drive and loaded to memory when required. This operation may temporarily stop displaying the picture on the screen. In this case, lower the game resolution or the screen settings. In addition, some 3D games, such as Dungeon and Fighter, RollerCoaster Tycoon 3, Special Forces, Universe at War, Transformer the Game etc, take up lots of hardware resources so upgrading system memory to 2G and above is recommneded. 187 Bluetooth

headset. A1 If the headset is connected to another device and is currently being used, you will not be able to locate it. In this case, even if you locate the headset, you will not be able to connect it. Disconnect the headset from the device and then try again. A2 If the headset is connected to the power adapter, the Bluetooth wireless connection is not available. Disconnect the headset from the power adapter and try again. A3 A Bluetooth headset generally provides On/Off and Pairing modes. To connect the headset to another Bluetooth device such as a computer or cellphone, it must be in Pairing mode. Switch the headset to Pairing mode and try again. In general, a Bluetooth headset in Pairing mode is automatically switched to On/ Off mode after a pre-

determined period of time.

I have connected the headset, but I cannot hear sound normally. A1 If the Bluetooth headset is properly connected to a computer, the Control Pane Sound Playback Device changes to Bluetooth Audio (for a mono headset) or High Quality Bluetooth Audio (for a stereo headset). If the Sound Playback Device in the Control Panel is not changed properly, you may not hear

in the Control Panel according to the procedures below.

Devices in the Control Panel

Start > Control Panel >

Sounds and Audio Devices.

Select the Audio tab in the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window.

Sound recording device is set to Bluetooth audio (for a mono headset) or High Quality Bluetooth audio (for a stereo headset). A2 connected and is operating normally. A3 headset and the computer. 188 A4 If a multimedia application such as Windows Media Player is running when connecting the headset, the headset may not be connected or recognized properly. Connect the

multimedia application. Security Center

To change the popup window display settings when connected to the Internet. In the Windows XP SP2 environment, you can decide whether to display a popup window when connected to the Internet, for user convenience and security. A1 To display most of the popup windows when connected to the Internet:

Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

In the Privacy tab of Internet

A2 To display popup windows only from the current site when connected to the Internet:

area at the bottom of the Internet

a menu, from which you can select Temporarily Allow Pop-ups or Always Allow Pop-ups from This Site.

189

When you connect to a Web site, you see the message, To help protect your security, Internet Explorer stopped this site from installing an ActiveX control on your computer or This site might require the following ActiveX control below the address bar. A ActiveX controls from being installed when connected to certain Web sites for security reasons. On some Web sites that have no ActiveX controls installed, applications are not started or do not display properly. In this case, to install ActiveX controls,

display a menu from which you can select Install ActiveX control. A3 To display popup windows from a particular site:

Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

In the Privacy tab of Internet

pop-ups.

Enter a URL to want to allow pop-ups into Address of Web site to allow and

is added to the allowed sites list. The next time you connect to the Web site, you will see pop-ups appearing.

permitted site, select the Web site

190

When you see a Windows Security appear on the right Alert icon part of the Taskbar. With the Security Center feature added, Windows XP SP2 checks the Firewall, the automatic updates

of virus-checking programs to display a Windows Security Alert icon on the right part of the Taskbar when it judges that the computer is vulnerable to attacks from the Internet. In this case, check the following to install the necessary components. A1 Set up the Windows Firewall. When you set up the Windows Firewall, you will be protected from unauthorized access through the

Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

From the General tab of Windows Firewall, select ON (recommended).

If you want to allow a certain program or service to gain access to your computer using the Firewall, select

that you want to allow access from, in the Exceptions tab of the Windows Firewall. If you want to add a program

Program and select it. A2 Set up Windows Automatic Updates. This automatically downloads and installs critical updates via the Internet

Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

From general tab of Automatic Updates window, select Automatic

(recommended). A3 Keep your computer current with the latest virus updates. (ex: Norton Antivirus) Even when you have installed Norton AntiVirus on your computer, Windows cannot recognize

settings, displaying a Security Alert icon. 191 A list of anti-virus programs that Windows can detect:

- Symantec Norton Anti-Virus

- TrendMicro

- ComputerAssociates

- Panda

- Ahnlabs (AhnLab) Visit the Microsoft Web site

(www.microsoft.com) regularly to

the registration settings. To protect your computer from virus

Options to display the Norton AntiVirus Options window. From

Run Automatic Protection to select

LiveUpdate to select LiveUpdate. A4 Two virus scanning programs on one

Remove one of the programs from the system. A5 If Windows does not recognize the existence of an anti-virus program even when it has been installed, your computer could be vulnerable to

install an anti-virus program that your computer is able to identify.

Windows can detect and select one from the list. 192

CPU (Optional) Cache Memory (Optional) Main Memory (Optional) Main Chipset (Optional) Hard Disk Drive (Optional) Optical Disk Drive (Optional) External ODD: USB 2.0/9.5mm Super-multi (Optional) Graphics (Optional) Sound Chipset Intel ATOM Processor (1.6GHz) 512KB 1GB, MAX 1GB, Memory type: DDR2 SODIMM Intel 945GSE + ICH7M 9.5mmH SATA HDD (80G~160G) or 9.5mmH SATA SSD (8G

/16G) Network (Optional) Multi Card Slot Ports (Optional) Dimensions LCD (Optional) Weight (Optional) Battery (Optional) Operating Environment Operating Voltage Frequency Output Power (Optional) Output Voltage Intel 945GSE (Internal) ALC272-GR Wired LAN: Marvell 88E8040 Wireless LAN: 802.11BG (Optional) Bluetooth 2.0+EDR (Optional) SD Card / SDHC Card / MMC USB 2.0 Port x 3, Video (Monitor) Port, Headphone

261 x 185.5 x 30.3mm 10.2/8.9 WSVGA (1024 x 600), 10.1 WSVGA (1024 x 576)

(Optional) 1.18Kg (With 3 Cell Standard Batteries) Lithium-Ion Smart Battery: 3Cell or 6Cell Temperature : -5~40C for storage, 10~32C when operating Humidity : 5~90% for storage, 20~80% when operating 100 - 240VAC 50/60Hz 40W (Optional) 19VDC 2.1A(40W) (Optional) 193

The weight and dimension listed are approximate values and may vary a bit from the actual product.

Optional components may not be provided or different components may be provided depending on the computer model.

194

Intel 802.11ABG WLAN

The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical

Power

Network

Item

Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Compatibility Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with

Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* Access) for Wi-Fi.

administrator. 195

RF Band 2.4GHz, 5GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11a mode : OFDM 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11a mode** : MAX 54Mbps 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode*** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11a mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11a device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11a)

***11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g) 196 Intel 802.11AGN WLAN

The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical

Power

Network

Item

Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V Compatibility IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with

Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* Access) for Wi-Fi.

administrator. 197

RF Band 2.4GHz, 5GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11a mode : OFDM 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11n mode : MIMO 11a mode**

: MAX 54Mbps

: MAX 11Mbps 11b mode 11g mode*** : MAX 54Mbps 11n mode**** : MAX 450Mbps, MAX 300Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11a mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11a device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11a)

*** 11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g)

****11n mode is only supported when it is connected to an IEEE802.11n device (e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE802.11n). 198

Intel 802.11BG WLAN

The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical

Power

Network

Item

Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V Compatibility IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with

Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* Access) for Wi-Fi.

administrator. 199

RF Band 2.4GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g) 200 Atheros 802.11BG WLAN

The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical

Power

Network

Item Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity

30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Temperature: Between 0C and 70C, Maximum Humidity: 85%

Power 3.3V IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Compatibility Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with

Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* Access) for Wi-Fi.

administrator. 201

RF Band 2.4GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11g mode is supported only when you are connected to an IEEE 802.11g device (e.g. An Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g). 202 Registered Trademarks ENERGY STAR Partner As an ENERGY STAR Partner, SAMSUNG has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy

Samsung Co., Ltd.

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Intel, ATOM/ Pentium/Celeron are

Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are

Corporation.

of the Sony Corporation. All other product or company names mentioned herein are registered

203 Glossary The Glossary lists the terminologies used in this User Guide.

Backup A way to save the current data to restore

to restore computer data when the data or computer is damaged. Device Manager An administrative tool used to manage computer devices. You can add or remove hardware or update a device driver using the Device Manager. Client This refers to a computer that uses a

server. DDR SDRAM (Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) DRAM is a memory type whose cells consist of a capacitor and transistor manufactured at a low price. SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by synchronizing

DDR SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by doubling the operating speed of the SDRAM and is widely used nowadays. This computer uses DDR SDRAM. Direct X An application interface developed to enable Windows application programs to access hardware devices at a very high speed. Since the operating speed of graphics, memory and sound cards must be very fast to provide high quality video and sound for games, Direct X enables faster control and interaction between applications and hardware devices. By using Direct X, the multimedia performance of Windows has been hugely improved. Driver Software that interacts between the hardware and the operating system. An

information and controls the hardware. In general, a driver is supplied with the corresponding hardware device. 204 LAN

computers, printers and other devices within a local area such as within a building. A LAN enables all connected devices to interact with other devices

the Ethernet media access control method developed in the early 1980s.

card called a LAN card, Ethernet card

To exchange data between computers, a protocol is required besides the hardware equipment. Windows XP uses TCP/IP as the default protocol. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) There are Passive Matrix and Active Matrix LCD types. This computer uses the Active Matrix type LCD called a TFT LCD. Since an LCD is implemented by transistors instead of a cathode-ray tube

strain. DVD DVD was developed to replace CD

size of the disc are the same as that of a CD, the capacity of a DVD is at least 4.7GB while the capacity of a CD is

(analog) video and supports MPEG2 compression and digital audio. To play a DVD, a DVD drive is required. Firewall A security system used to protect an

through an authentication procedure. Hibernation Mode A power mode that saves all data in

Hibernation Mode, all application programs that were running are restored to their last state. Icon This refers to a small image that

205 Network A group of computers and devices, such as printers and scanners, connected

can be either small or large and can be connected permanently through cables or temporarily through telephone lines

Quick Launch This refers to a toolbar that can be

program such as Internet Explorer or

icon.

This refers to the right area of the

as the volume control, the power options and the time. Power Schemes This refers to a pre-determined power management option group. For example, you can set the time the computer waits before entering Standby Mode, or before the monitor or hard drive turns off. The settings are saved as a power scheme. Server In general, a server refers to a computer that provides shared resources for

Share This refers to setting a resource of a computer such as a folder or printer so that other users can also use it. Shared Folder A folder that can be used by other users

206 SSD This refers to a device that saves

two types of SSD. One saves data to the DRAM and the other saves data to the Flash Memory. Since there are no mechanical parts, an SSD provides a much better performance than an HDD. Especially, a Flash Memory-Type SSD provides high reliability and durability. Network Administrator

called a system administrator. Sleep Mode A power mode that enables computers to save power consumption when they are not being used. When a computer is in Sleep Mode, the data on the computer memory is not saved to the

data in memory will be lost. System File

and used by the Windows operating

be deleted or moved. USB (Universal Serial Bus) This refers to a serial interface standard developed to replace the conventional interface standards such as Serial and PS/2. While USB 1.1 supports 12Mbps

(12 million bits per second), USB 2.0 supports a data rate that is 40 times

(480Mpbs) faster than that of USB 1.1. The data rate of USB 2.0 is equivalent to that of IEEE1394. Therefore USB 2.0 is used for A/V devices supported by IEEE 1394 and a 2nd HDD and CDRW that require a high data rate. Windows Media Player A multimedia program included with Windows. Using this program, you can

listen to a radio broadcast, search and

portable device, etc. 207 Index B Battery Battery Calibration BIOS Setup Bluetooth Booting Priority 177 182 167 109 173 C CD Drive / Recording 59 178 Charge

55

Connect / Output Monitor 65 Connecting AP / AP 103 87 Control Panel D

Dual View

77 70 E Easy Battery Manager 180

105 ExpressCard Slot 64 8 S Safety Precautions Samsung Update Plus 135

183 Shortcut Keys 52 43 Status Indicators T Touchpad 54 U User Accounts / Switch User 89 V Volume Control

W Windows XP

72 75

100

103 H Help L LCD Brightness M Memory Multi Card Slot Multimedia 76 166 174 61 116 N

105

108 P Password Product Name

219 Program 171 42 115 R Recorder Charge Resolution / Color 72 179 91 208 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE

[U.S.A. / U.K.] Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE If you have any comments or questions regarding a Samsung products, contact the SAMSUNG customer care center. Customer Care Center TEL U.S.A. 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.K. 0870-SAMSUNG (726-7864) Web Site www.samsung.com/us

[GERMANY] Kontakt zu Samsung

den Samsung-Kundendienst. Customer Care Center GERMANY TEL

Web Site www.samsung.de

[FRANCE] Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs Samsung. Customer Care Center FRANCE TEL 3260 SAMSUNG (726-7864)

Web Site www.samsung.com/fr

[SPAIN] Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE Si tiene alguna pregunta o comentario referente a nuestros productos, por favor contacte con nuestro Servicio de Atencion al Cliente. Customer Care Center SPAIN TEL 902 10 11 30 Web Site www.samsung.com/es 209

[ITALY] Contatta SAMSUNG Se hai commenti o richieste sui prodotti Samsung contatta il nostro Servizio Clienti. Customer Care Center ITALY TEL 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) Web Site www.samsung.com/it

Customer Care Center POLAND TEL 0801-1-SAMSUNG (726-78) 022-SAMSUNG (726-7864) Web Site www.samsung.com/pl

Customer Care Center RUSSIA UKRAINE TEL 8-800-555-55-55 8-800-502-0000 Web Site www.samsung.ru www.samsung.ua

[CHINA]

Customer Care Center CHINA TEL 400-810-5858 Web Site www.samsung.com.cn 210

[HONGKONG] Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE If you have any comments or questions regarding a Samsung products, contact the SAMSUNG customer care center. Customer Care Center TEL HONGKONG 3698-4698 Web Site

[NETHERLANDS / BELGIUM]] Contact opnemen met SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE

Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs Samsung. Customer Care Center NETHERLANDS TEL 0900-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

02 201 24 18 BELGIUM Web Site www.samsung.com/nl www.samsung.com/be

[TURKEY] SAMSUNG Turkiyeye Ulasin

Customer Care Center TURKEY TEL 444 77 11 Web Site www.samsung.com/tr 211 Rev.2.0

 

 

Directions Meanings of icons:

Forbidding: forbid improper operations to avoid damaging the Notebook PC. Caution: cautions for operators to avoid potential damages. Please note and remember. Importance: important information, common notes, definitions, general knowledge and references, etc. Other trademarks and trade name may be used in this manual to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. The manufacture disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission from the manufacture is strictly forbidden. Product images in this manual are for your reference only. 1 Content Directions ..............................................................................................................................1 Safety Precautions ...............................................................................................................4 1 Knowing Your Notebook PC ............................................................................................6 1-1 Top Side .....................................................................................................................6 1-2 Right Side ...................................................................................................................7 1-3 Left Side ......................................................................................................................7 1-4 Bottom Side ................................................................................................................7 2 Caring the Notebook PC...................................................................................................8 2-1 LCD Screen ................................................................................................................8 2-2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ...............................................................................................8 2-3 Battery Pack ...............................................................................................................9 2-4 Keyboard ....................................................................................................................9 2-5 Touch Pad ..................................................................................................................9 2-6 Other accessories ......................................................................................................9 2-7 If the water comes into the Notebook PC ................................................................10 2-8 Other Notes ..............................................................................................................10 3 Traveling with the Notebook PC ...................................................................................11 3-1 Attention ....................................................................................................................11 3-2 How to enter the suspend mode ..............................................................................11 4 Keep the data for future possible use ..........................................................................12 4-1 HDD Partition ............................................................................................................12 4-2 Class the data in the HDD .......................................................................................12 5 Getting Started ................................................................................................................13 5-1 Install the Rechargeable Battery..............................................................................13 5-2 Remove the Battery Pack ........................................................................................13 5-3 Connecting the Power Adapter ................................................................................14 6 Using Your Notebook PC ...............................................................................................15 6-1 Turning on the Notebook PC ...................................................................................15 6-2 Adjust the Brightness of LCD Screen ......................................................................15 6-3 Keyboard Usage .......................................................................................................15 6-4 Card Reader Usage .................................................................................................16 6-5 The Memory Card ....................................................................................................16 7 Internet Connection ........................................................................................................17 7-1 Connect the Lineate LAN .........................................................................................17 7-2 Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................18 7-3 The wireless LAN Express Card ..............................................................................19 8 Bluetooth ..........................................................................................................................20 8-1 Activate Bluetooth ....................................................................................................20 8-2 Add a Bluetooth Device............................................................................................21 2 8-3 Establish a connection .............................................................................................22 8-4 Terminate a connection............................................................................................22 9 Power Managing System................................................................................................23 9-1 Battery System .........................................................................................................23 9-1-1 Checking Battery Power ..................................................................................23 9-1-2 Charging the Battery Pack ..............................................................................24 9-1-3 Low Power Warning ........................................................................................24 9-1-4 Battery Power ..................................................................................................24 9-1-5 Store the Battery Pack ....................................................................................24 9-1-6 Prolonging the Batterys Life ...........................................................................24 9-2 Power Management Modes .....................................................................................25 9-2-1 Standby mode of the System ..........................................................................25 9-2-2 Hibernate .........................................................................................................25 9-2-3 Log Off .............................................................................................................25 9-2-4 Restart the System ..........................................................................................26 9-3 Power Saving ...........................................................................................................26 9-3-1 Connect the Adapter without using Battery Pack ...........................................26 9-3-2 Adjust the brightness of LCD Screen..............................................................26 10 Upgrading Your Notebook PC .....................................................................................27 10-1 Connect the External Monitor ................................................................................27 10-1-1 How to connect the External Monitor ............................................................27 10-1-2 Connect Keyboard and Mouse .....................................................................27 10-1-3 Connect Audio Device ...................................................................................27 10-1-4 Lock Port ........................................................................................................28 10-2 Enter the BIOS Setup Menu ..................................................................................28 11 Appendix ........................................................................................................................30 11-1 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................30 11-2 Specifications .........................................................................................................32 3 Safety Precautions 1. DO NOT press or touch the LCD Screen. DO NOT place the Notebook PC with small items, they may scratch LCD Screen or enter the Notebook PC. 2. DO NOT expose the Notebook PC to dirty or dusty environment. Keep the environment clean and dry. 3. DO NOT place the Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surface. 4. DO NOT place or drop objects on the top of the Notebook PC. DO NOT shove any foreign objects into the Notebook PC. DO NOT cover the LCD Screen strongly. 5. DO NOT expose the Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields; DO NOT place the floppy disk near or on the Notebook PC, that may loss the data of the floppy disk. 6. DO NOT leave the Notebook PC facing the sun as it can damage the LCD Screen, especially in the car. 7. SAFE TEMP: This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5(41) and 35(95). 8. DO NOT expose the Notebook PC to or use near liquids, rain, or moisture. 9. Caution: risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 10. DO NOT throw the Notebook PC in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Please recycle the Battery Pack, and check with your Local Authority or retailer for recycling advice. 11. The Notebook PC and the Adapter may occur some heat during operating or 12. charging. DO NOT leave the Notebook PC on your lap or any part of the body in order to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. INPUT RATING: Refer to the rating label on the Notebook PC and be sure that the Power Adapter complies with the rating. Only use attachments or accessories specified by the manufacturer. 13. Checking the connections between the main unit and attachments before turning on the Notebook PC. 14. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during eating food avoid dirtying the Notebook PC. 15. DO NOT insert anything into the Notebook PC that may result in short circuit or damage the circuit. 16. Powering off the Notebook PC, if you want install or remove some external devices, which are not support hot-plug. 17. Disconnect the Notebook PC from the electrical outlet and remove any installed batteries before cleaning. And Keep it away from children. 18. DO NOT disassemble the Notebook PC, only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Otherwise, problem may result and the manufacturer should not hold responsibility for the damage. 19. Only use Battery Packs approved by the manufacturer or else damage may occur. 20. The Notebook PC has some little metal flake to disperse heat. DO NOT place the Notebook PC on soft objects (e.g.: bed, sofa, your lap), or else the Notebook PC may become hot and halt the system operating. 4 Notice for the USA FCC Part 15:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced technician for help. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that my cause undesired operation. CAUTION: To comply with the limits of the Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules, this device is comply with Class B limits. All peripherals must be shielded and grounded. Operation with non-certified peripherals or non-shielded cables may results in interference to radio or reception. MODIFICATION: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the users authority to operate the device. 5 1 Knowing Your Notebook PC 1-1 Top Side 1. Built-in Camera Click Fn+NumLk to turn on the light Click Fn+F1 to turn on or off the and the numeric keypad is camera function. unlocked. 2. LCD Screen 3. Microphone 4. Power button 5. Keyboard 10. Cap Lock Indicator Light is green when the cap keypad is unlocked. 11. Charge Indicator 6. 7. 8. 9. Power Indicator HDD Status Indicator Light is orange during being charged and is green when the Light is green when the HDD is in battery is fully charged. active mode. WiFi Indicator Numeric Keypad Indicator 12. Left-key 13. Right-key 14. Touch Pad 6 1-2 Right Side 1. SD/MMC/MS Port 2. USB Port (2.0) 3. VGA Port 4. Lock Port 1-3 Left Side 1. Power Jack 2. Ethernet/LAN Port 3. USB Port (2.0) 4. Headphone Jack 5. Microphone Jack 6. Express Card Port The USB card can only be inserted in one orientation. Force to insert the card may in result of damage. 1-4 Bottom Side 1. Lithium Rechargeable Battery 2. Battery Latch 3. Speakers 7 2 Caring the Notebook PC The Notebook PC is a precision device; the error operation may damage the device. 2-1 LCD Screen LCD Screen is the most delicate component of the Notebook PC and comprised of thin glass. It may be broken up by external abrupt force. DO NOT scratch the cover of the Notebook PC, or the scrape on the cover cannot remove. DO NOT cover the LCD Screen strongly, or else damage may occur. DO NOT place objects on the keyboard to avoid damaging the screen and keyboard when you cover the LCD Screen. Place the Notebook PC in carrying case to protect it from dirt, water, shock and scratches before traveling. DO NOT drop or place heavy objects on the LCD Screen. DO NOT scratch the LCD Screen with your fingernails or any hard objects. Use a soft and lint-free cloth to wipe your Notebook PC and wipe it gently in order to avoid damaging the LCD Screen. Shut down the LCD Screen, if the Notebook PC will not be used for a long time. DO NOT clean the LCD Screen with chemical cleaners. The LCD Screen DOES NOT come into contact with hard objects (E.g.: cloth button, watchband). Use a soft and lint-free dry cloth to wipe the LCD Screen smoothly. DO NOT use your hand to wipe the LCD Screen directly. DO NOT spill liquid into the Notebook PC as it can damage the components of the Notebook PC. Cover the LCD Screen smoothly in order to avoid moving the hinges and flashing the LCD Screen. DO NOT clean the Touch Pad with acidic cleaner or spray cleaning solution directly on the Notebook PC. 2-2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Place the operating Notebook PC in steady and even table. Poor handling of the Notebook PC may damage the HDD. The HDD is the most delicate component in turning on and powering off the system. The HDD operates at unsteady fast speeds during turning on the Notebook PC; the vibrancy may damage the track of HDD. If the axes of the HDD have not stop completely at the powering off the Notebook PC, the vibrancy may damage the HDD. 8 2-3 Battery Pack Please recycle the Battery Pack, and check with your Local Authority or retailer for recycling advice. DO NOT put the Battery Pack near or into the fire, or else it may cause fire or explode. The Battery Pack will short circuit if the Battery Pack is punctured or reassembled The ideal temperature range that the Battery Pack be used is between 20-30. Any temperatures above or below this range will shorten the life of the Battery Pack. 2-4 Keyboard Keyboard is the most often used component by finger directly. Use a little brush to clean or a can of compressed air to remove dust from between the keys on the keyboard. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or cleaner and wipe the surface of the keys smoothly. If the water seeps into the keyboard, the circuit will not be damaged directly because of the no-power supply keyboard. But the deteriorate of the Printed circuit board will occur and will result in malfunction of the keyboard. Contact your dealer for advises at this moment. 2-5 Touch Pad Keep your hand clean when using the Touch Pad, or else the cursor is out of control. If the Touch Pad is dirty, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water and wipe the Touch Pad smoothly. The Touch Pad is pressure sensitive, DO NOT scratch the Touch Pad with hard objects, or rest heavy objects on it. 2-6 Other accessories Following the below steps before cleaning your Notebook PC and the accessories. 1. Turn off the Notebook PC. Disconnect your Notebook PC and all external devices from their electrical outlets and remove the installed battery. 2. Use the little dust collector to pump the dust from the slot of plug or keyboard. 3. Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water and wipe the surface of the Notebook PC smoothly. DO NOT seep liquid into the Notebook PC in order to avoid shorting of circuit and the damage of the Notebook PC. 4. Turn on the Notebook PC after drying it. 9 2-7 If the water comes into the Notebook PC DO NOT turn on the Notebook PC immediately. Disconnect the outlet cable and detach the Battery Pack in order to turn off the Notebook PC, instead of pressing the POWER button to turn off it. Disconnect all external devices. Spill out the water from the Notebook PC. Use a soft and waterish paper or cloth to wipe the surface of the Notebook PC lightly. Use the fanner to dry the Notebook PC and the accessories, and then send it to the service center for advice. DO NOT use hair drier to dry the Notebook PC, or the high temperature may distort it. DO NOT place the Notebook PC into the dirty carrying case again. 2-8 Other Notes DO NOT expose the Notebook PC in hot environment for a long time, especially in the car. Or the parts of the Notebook PC will be metamorphic. Keep the data for future possible use termly. Renew the hardware or software termly in order to keep the Notebook PC compatible and steady. 10 3 Traveling with the Notebook PC Turn off the Notebook PC and disconnect all lines before moving it. Following the below steps, if you want to travel with your Notebook PC. 3-1 Attention 1. Charge the Battery Pack and the spare Battery Pack fully. 2. Turn off the Notebook PC and disconnect from the wall outlets. 3. Shut down the LCD Screen completely and smoothly. 4. Disconnect the AC lines. 5. Disconnect all lines. 6. Place the Notebook PC in carrying case to protect it from dirt, water, shock and scratches before traveling. 7. Check that you have taken the spare Battery Pack, AC Adapter, power lines, manual and warranty card. DO NOT forget the passwords of the Notebook PC and HDD. 8. Find out the voltage type in the countries you will visit. Your Notebook PC comes with a universal AC-DC adapter, so you only need to buy the different power cords to connect the different outlets or the hotel may provide univers al outlets to support your power cord as well as voltages. If you drive your car with the Notebook PC, DO NOT leave the Notebook PC facing the sun. Place it in the shady and cool area. DO NOT remove the HDD immediately while or after operating. Set the Notebook PC into the Standby mode or Hibernation mode, before moving it. The connection between Internet and your Notebook PC will be interrupted when the system enter the hibernation mode. 3-2 How to enter the suspend mode Click the left button of the mouse on the Start Click the left button of the mouse on the POWER OFFClick the left button of the mouse on Standbyor Hibernation itemsthen the system will enter the standby mode or Hibernate mode. If you will attend a meeting with the Notebook PC and want still keep the Notebook PC in the current state, please set the system into suspend mode. When you turn on the Notebook PC again, the system will return the last state, which you want. 11 4 Keep the data for future possible use Your computer has been fully tested and complies with the system specifications before shipping. However, incorrect operations, mishandling or any other reasons may loss your data, e.g.: Delete or cover the data by error, Damage the HDD by vibration, Damaged by Network virus, Disaster, Loss the data because of being stolen. 4-1 HDD Partition The damage of the HDD or the operating system may be result in the loss of the data in the HDD. So you need to save your data to another memory card to avoid losing the data. In order to improve the performance of your Notebook PC, the HDD of your Notebook PC can be formatted with some partitions, C, D and so on. Save files to the any partitions except C partition. Then you can retrieval or reinstall the operating system without damaging your data. Select the available software to part the HDD, as you like. 4-2 Class the data in the HDD 1) Files: Office filesPicturesMusic and so on. 2) E-mail: Sent mail, Address List and so on. 3) Information of Website: The favorite of ExplorerBookmarks of Net-scape and so on. Save these data to the same file, or else you may forget copying some files to the spare HDD or the other memory card. Please save your data for future possible use termly. 12 5 Getting Started 5-1 Install the Rechargeable Battery Power the Notebook PC before using it. There are two ways to power the Notebook PC: Use the AC Adapter to power it or use the removable Battery Pack. The Notebook PC is designed to work with a removable Battery Pack. Your Notebook PC may or may not have its Battery Pack installed. If your Notebook PC does not have its Battery Pack installed, using the following procedures to install the Battery Pack:

Push the Battery Pack toward the arrow into the Notebook PC until you hear it click and lock into place. 5-2 Remove the Battery Pack 1. Turn off the Notebook PCand disconnect all lines. 2. Shut down and turn over the computer to access its base in flat and clean work surface. 3. Slide the Battery Latch toward the arrow . 4. Draw the Battery Pack towards the arrow to release the Battery Pack from the Notebook PC. WARNING! For safety reasons, DO NOT disassemble the Battery Pack, DO NOT short the circuit, DO NOT throw the Battery Pack into fire and keep it away from children. When the Notebook PC with Battery Pack (disconnect the adapter) turns on, the Power Indicator will turn on. And the light will turn off when in standby mode or system halting. DO NOT attempt to remove the Battery Pack while the Notebook PC turns on, as this may result in the loss of working data. Damage may occur if you use a different adapter to power the Notebook PC or use the Notebook PCs adapter to power other electrical devices. 13 5-3 Connecting the Power Adapter The Notebook PC comes with a universal AC-DC adapter and the allowable input voltage of adapter is from 100V to 240V. Following the below steps to connect the adapter:

1. Take the adapter and the power cord, and then connect the adapter with the power cord. 2. Plug the DC end of adapter into the power jack of the Notebook PC. 3. Insert the AC end to the wall outlet 4. Check the connections above correctly before turning on the Notebook PC. DO NOT remove the Notebook PC if the HDD is being read or written, that may result in the loss of the data and the damage of the disk. Follow the system steps to turn off the Notebook PC. Your Notebook PC and the accessories may differ from the pictures shown. 14 6 Using Your Notebook PC 6-1 Turning on the Notebook PC 1. Open the LCD screen and adjust the angle of the Notebook PCs LCD Screen 2. Press the POWER button to turn on the Notebook PC. 6-2 Adjust the Brightness of LCD Screen The Notebook PC uses an active matrix TFT LCD and provides a Display (Monitor) Output Port to connect the external monitor. The Notebook PC supports the function to adjust the LCD Screen through the following composite buttons. Click Function

<Fn>+<F10>

Shift between LCD Screen and external monitor

<Fn>+<F11>

Decrease the brightness of screen

<Fn>+<F12>

Increase the brightness of screen LCD Screen is made of glass and may be damaged if the Notebook PC is dropped or shoves any hard object. 6-3 Keyboard Usage The Notebook PCs integrated a keyboard with 84 keys. Click the numeric/symbol keys to input the desired keys after starting the keyboard. Press <Fn+NumLk> key to enable the keypad, the light indicates that the keypad is active; press < Fn+NumLk> key again to disable the keypad. Each key on the keyboard may have multiple functions in different software. 15 Function Keys These function keys with the color word or icon sign means that their function only can be activated when clicking the function key and the <Fn> key at the same time.

<Fn>+<F1>Turn on or turn off the camera window.

<Fn>+<F2>Turn on or turn off the WiFi.

<Fn>+<F3>Turn on or turn off the mute.

<Fn>+<F4>Turn down the volume.

<Fn>+<F5>Turn up the volume.

<Fn>+<F6>Play or pause the playback.

<Fn>+<F7>Return to the previous track.

<Fn>+<F8>Go to the next track.

<Fn>+<F9>Stop the playback.

<Fn>+<F10>Shift between LCD Screen and external monitor.

<Fn>+<F11>/<F12>Decrease/Increase brightness of LCD Screen. 6-4 Card Reader Usage The Notebook PC has a single built-in memory card reader that can read the following flash memory cards: Secure Digital, Multi-Media Card, Memory Stick. See the manual of the relevant card for more information. 6-5 The Memory Card Insert The Memory Card The card only can be inserted in one orientation (with the cards electrical contacts towards the bottom of the unit) Force to insert the card may in result of damage. Pull out the Memory Card Stop the cards operation, then pull the card out from the port. 16 7 Internet Connection 7-1 Connect the Lineate LAN Before connecting the network with your computer, setup your network system first, and then connect telecommunication line to your Notebook PC. Setting the Network system Click the right button of the mouse on the My Network Places, click the left button of the mouse on the Properties item to enter the Network Connections windows, as show below Contact your Internet service provider for more information about the setting of IP and DNS. Click the right button of the mouse on the icon of Local Area Connections, click left button of the mouse on the Properties item to display the menu of Local Area Connection Properties, as show right:

17 On the menu of Local Area Connections Properties, click the left button of the mouse on the Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) click the left button of the mouse on the Properties to enter the Internet ProtocolTCP/IPProperties windows. Select the General label on the Internet ProtocolTCP/IPProperties windows, and enter the address of your IP and DNS, or select Obtain an IP address automatically. 7-2 Wireless LAN Click <Fn>+<F2> to turn the wireless network on or off. When the wireless network turns on, the WIFI Indicator turns on and the icon of WIFI will display on the right-bottom of the desktop. Click the right button of the mouse on the icon of WIFI, click the left button of the mouse on the View Available Wireless Networks of the pop-up menu or click the left button of the mouse doubly on the icon of WIFI to enter the windows of Wireless Network Connection, as show below:

Click the left button of the mouse on the Refresh of the windows, the system will search and list the available wireless Networks. The information of the Networks will be displayed when you select the relevant network. Some Networks may need to type the password before connecting. 18 7-3 The wireless LAN Express Card The Notebook PC supplies Express Card/34 port. The Express Card that comes with the wireless LAN Access Point can be purchased separately and is designed for building a wireless LAN environment. See the manual of the Express Card for more information. If your computer cannot connect with network, you may have to reset your network system, change the telecommunication line or contact your Internet service provider for help. 19 8 Bluetooth The Notebook PC supports Bluetooth function under Window XP. You are enabled to communicate wirelessly with other Bluetooth enabled computers, mobile phones or the related devices. You can also purchase the Bluetooth software from the local distributor or its authorized center. 8-1 Activate Bluetooth Right click the mouse on the icon of "My Network places" on the desktop and select Properties to enter the window as shown below:

On the above menu, right click the mouse on the icon of Bluetooth Network Connect to view the Bluetooth function menu. You can initialize the Bluetooth through the following means when you use it at first time:

Double click the icon Bluetooth Network Connect---enter the window Bluetooth Personal Area Network Devices---click Bluetooth Devices---enter the label Options, as shown below:

Turn discovery on: to allow Bluetooth devices to find this computer;

20 Allow Bluetooth devices to connect to this computer: to use these settings to control whether a Bluetooth device can connect to this computer;

Alarm me when a new Bluetooth device wants to connect: to alarm me when a new Bluetooth device wants to connect or not;

Show the Bluetooth icon in the notification area: to add the Bluetooth icon to the notification area, which would be convenient to configure Bluetooth device later;

Restore Defaults: to make the Bluetooth device setting restore to the factory status. 8-2 Add a Bluetooth Device Before this step, please active your Bluetooth device (mobile phone, Bluetooth earphone and ect). On the above menu Bluetooth Devices, click the label Devices---select Add---enter Add Bluetooth Device Wizard, as shown below:

On the above menu, click to tick the front panel on the item of My device is set up and ready to be found and click Next to start searching, the found Bluetooth device will be listed on the window, see as below:

21 8-3 Establish a connection On the above window, select one Bluetooth device and click Next. See as below:

If it needs to use one passkey, click to tick Let me choose my own passkey and fill in as instruction, then click Next;

If it doesnt need one passkey, click to tick Dont use a passkey, then click next;

To enter one passkey on the above panel as instruction, input the same one in your Bluetooth device to start installing Bluetooth device;

Click Finish to finish connection between the Bluetooth device and the computer and the right-bottom corner of the desktop would appear a cue as shown right:

8-4 Terminate a connection Click the right button of the mouse on the icon of Bluetooth Network Connect icon, and select Disconnect. 22 9 Power Managing System 9-1 Battery System The Notebook PC is designed to work with a removable and high capability Battery Pack. 9-1-1 Checking Battery Power Click the left button of the mouse on StartControl PanelPerformance and Maintenance , then click Power Options, the menu will display as below. On the window, click the left button of the mouse on Power Meter label to check the power of the battery. Set the shortcut to check the remaining battery power: click the left button of the mouse on Advanced label, select Always show icon on the taskbar. Then move your cursor over the power icon in the left-bottom of the desktop to see the battery power. DO NOT attempt to remove the Battery Pack while the Notebook PC is turned on, as this may result in loss of working data and damage of the Notebook PC. When you use your Notebook PC first time, check the remaining battery power, and make sure that the new Battery Pack has been completely charged. The Battery Pack has limit on the number times it can be recharged. In any case, the Battery Packs usage time will eventually decrease and a new Battery Pack must be purchased from an authorized dealer for this Notebook PC. 23 9-1-2 Charging the Battery Pack When you use your Notebook PC first time, check the remaining battery power, and make sure that the new Battery Pack has been completely charged before the Notebook PC is disconnected from external power. The Battery Pack begins to charge as soon as the Notebook PC is connected to the external power, and the Charge Indicator light will turn on. When the Battery Pack charges completely, the Charge Indicator light will turn off. Save your working data or connect the adapter when the battery power is low. And the battery will stop charging if the battery is fully charged. 9-1-3 Low Power Warning The system will display the warning windows and advise you to connect the adapter, when battery power is low. Save your working data if you dont have the adapter at this moment. The warning function can be set in the Power Options menu. 9-1-4 Battery Power The Battery Packs actual figure varies will depend on how you use the power saving features, your general work habits, the CPU, system memory size, and the size of LCD Screen. Please turn on the manage power function and connect the adapter to save electric power. 9-1-5 Store the Battery Pack DO NOT leave the Battery Pack discharged; the Battery Pack will discharge over time. But in any case, the Battery Packs usage time will eventually decrease and a new Battery Pack must be purchased. It is ideal that the battery be stored in a temperature range between 10 and 35. Any temperatures above or below this range will shorten the life of the battery. If the temperature is too high, it may cause fire or explode. DO NOT throw the Notebook PC in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. 9-1-6 Prolonging the Batterys Life Use the AC adapter wherever the AC wall outlet is available. Charge the battery completely for using in your traveling. The ideal working temperature is from 20 to 30. Any temperatures above or below this range will shorten the actual usage time of the Battery Pack. After charging the Battery Pack completely, keep the Battery Pack in the Notebook PC. It will stop charging if the Battery Pack is fully charged and not be damaged. 24 DO NOT leave the Battery Pack discharged over three month, the Battery Pack will be damaged, it must continue to be charge every three months, as well as the spare Battery Pack. Purchase an additional Battery Pack. DO NOT often plug or pull the Adapter from the electric outlets, it is the best way to prolong the Battery Packs life. The life expectancy of the Battery Pack is approximately 300 recharges. Store the Battery Pack in cool and dry place, the ideal temperature is from 10 to 30. The Battery Pack will discharge quickly in hot environment and the life of the Battery Pack will be shortened. DO NOT throw the Notebook PC in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. DO NOT put the Battery Pack near or in the fire, or else it may cause fire or explode. The Battery Pack will short circuit if the Battery Pack puncture or reassemble. 9-2 Power Management Modes 9-2-1 Standby mode of the System The function of Standby mode: Store your current data and status in RAM, turn off the external device, but the Power Indicator Light still turns on. If you press the POWER button, the system will operate again. 9-2-2 Hibernate In Hibernate mode: The current data and status are stored on HDD and the Notebook PC turns off (the Power Indicator Light will turn off). Press the POWER button to restarting the system. Activate the Hibernate function: Click the left button of the mouse on the Hibernate label of thePower Options Propertieswindows, select the Enable Hibernate, then System Hibernate will display inPower Options Properties windows. 9-2-3 Log Off Click the left button of the mouse on Start click the left button of the mouse on POWER OFF select Standby or Hibernate Enter the standby mode or the hibernate mode. If the system is force to turn off because of using up the power in the standby mode. Your current data and status will be stored on the HDD. The system will operate again after changing a power-full battery or connecting the wall outlets. 25 When the power is used up, the Notebook PC will exit the standby mode and turn off. Store your working data, before using up the power of the Battery Pack. 9-2-4 Restart the System Press POWER button to exit the suspend mode and enter the current status. And the restart function will reactivate all the operating programs. Press and hold the POWER button for over 4 seconds to turn off the Notebook PC if the system halts. Press and hold the POWER button for over 2 seconds to turn off in normal mode. 9-3 Power Saving When you use a battery as the source power for your Notebook PC, you can take advantage of power management settings to conserve battery life. 9-3-1 Connect the Adapter without using Battery Pack The Battery Pack has a limit on the number times it can be recharged. DO NOT use the Battery Pack if you have the adapter. 9-3-2 Adjust the brightness of LCD Screen If necessary, adjust the brightness of the LCD Screen in order to save the electric power. Close the LCD Screen if you dont need to use your computer for a brief period. 26 10 Upgrading Your Notebook PC 10-1 Connect the External Monitor The Notebook PC supplies a VGA port for connecting External Monitor or projective device. 10-1-1 How to connect the External Monitor 1. Turn off the Notebook PC and insert the 15-pin D-sub monitor plug to the external monitor. 2. Turn on the Notebook PC.

<Fn>+<F10>Shift between LCD Screen and external monitor. 10-1-2 Connect Keyboard and Mouse The Notebook PCs integrated a keyboard with 84 keys. If you want to use the external keyboard or mouse, connect the external keyboard and external mouse by the USB port. When you disconnect the external keyboard or external mouse from the computer, grasp the connector, not the cable itself, and pull firmly but gently to avoid damaging the cable. 10-1-3 Connect Audio Device The Notebook PC can be connected headphone, sound box and microphone. The speaker will turn off automatically after connecting the external headphone to the Notebook PC. Excessively loud volume could damage your hearing. So turn down the volume before connecting earphone, and then raise the volume to comfortable level. 27 10-1-4 Lock Port The Lock Port allows the Notebook PC to be secured using and can prevent the Notebook PC to be removed from a fixed object. 10-2 Enter the BIOS Setup Menu Follow the below steps to enter the BIOS Setup Menu:

1. Click F2 button quickly during loading the system, then the system will enter Setup Utility as shown below:

2. Click the left/ right direction keys to select Boot and click the Enter button to enter the below menu:

On the menu, click the up/down direction keys to select Legacy and click the Enter button to enter the below menu:

28 3. Click the up/down direction keys to select Boot Type Order and click the Enter button to enter the below menu:

4. Click the Shift + +or click - directly to remove the item position and then click the up/down direction button to select the startup option. Proceed to click F10 to popup the dialogue box and select Yes firstly, then click Enter to save the setting as shown below:

There is no need to change the startup order and click F12 directly to select the temporary startup option after turning on the unit. 29 11 Appendix 11-1 Troubleshooting Q1How to turn off the Notebook PC when the halted system cannot warm boot?

APress the POWER button and hold 4 or 6 seconds to turn off the Notebook PC. Q2How to check the Notebook PC if the Notebook PC cannot be turned off?

A1.If the power is low, connect to the electric outlets. 2.Check that the video display system is not in the external monitor mode. 3.Make sure the indicator of the adapter turns on and the adapter works well. 4. Remove the U disk, SD card and any other external device. Q3If the water come into the Notebook PC A1. DO NOT turn on the Notebook PC. 2. Disconnect the outlet cable and detach the Battery Pack in order to turn off the Notebook PC, instead of pressing the POWER button to turn off it. Disconnect all external devices. 3. Spill out the water from the Notebook PC. Use a soft and waterish paper or cloth to wipe the surface of the Notebook PC lightly. 4. Use the fanner to dry the Notebook PC and the accessories, and then send to the service center for advice. 5. DO NOT place the Notebook PC into the dirty carrying case to again. Q4After entering the standby mode, why the system cannot reactivate and how to check this problem?

ADefinition:

Standby ModeStore your current data and status in RAM, turn off the external device, but the Power Indicator Light still turns on. Press POWER button to operate the system again. Suspend ModeThe computer saves the current state of the system in RAM and switches off power to the CPU. The power indicator light flashes in this mode. Press the POWER button to restart the system. Q5Why the system cannot be recover?

A1.Damage from External memory or built-in memory: If the data are saved to an error memory address, the data cannot restore. 2. Incompatible external device: The system may enter the standby mode and cannot resume, when the incompatible external device is connected to the Notebook PC. 3.Error from drive program or application program: The system may refuse to operate some files (file formats: .dll, .sys, .exe and so on.) and enter the standby mode or hibernate mode. If the incompatible application program will be refused by the operating system, the system may fail to recover. 30 Q6How to check the system which cannot recover?

A1.Remove the external devices and their device program. 2.Refresh BIOS system 3.Refresh the appropriate program. 4.Remove the error application program. 5.Reinstall the operating system. 6.Send back the Notebook PC for checking. Q7How to prolong the life of the Battery Pack?

A1. Adjust the brightness of the LCD Screen to proper level. 2. Turn down the volume. 3. Make the appropriate setting in the Power Management menu. Q8: If the image isnt clear A: Check that the lens is clear or not, if not, clean with the soft cloth. Q9: If the mobile moves slowly A: The camera needs some light when gathering the data and the speed will be slow if the light condition isnt good. Please adjust the screen position of the Notebook PC or the position of the user. The image display also shall be slower by the heavy loading for the system when the many applications are running. Please close the unused procedure. Note:

Q8 and Q9 are the questions when you are using the camera for video capture, conferencing, and chatting. 31 11-2 Specifications Main Feature CPU Intel Atom N270 (1.6GHz, 533MHz FSB) CPU Power Consumption 2.5W MAX L1 Cache Size On-die, primary 32-kB instructions cache and 24-kB, write-back data cache L2 Cache Size 512-kB on-die second level cache Memory (#) 1GB(Max 2GB) Memory Type DDRII 533/667 MHz Storage HDD Capacities (#) 250GB TFT Screen TFT Screen Size 10 inch Screen Type TFT Description TFT LCD 1024X600 (WSVGA) Built-in Camera Resolution 1.3M Pixels Bluetooth Specification Bluetooth V2.0 + EDR Video/Audio Feature Video Card Type Intel GMA 950 32 Video Card Capacity Share Dynamic EMS Memory 128MB(Max) Audio System Built-in speaker Sound Card Type HD Codec I/O Device Mouse Keyboard Condition Touch Pad 84-key keyboard Operating Temperature 5-35 Operating Humidity 35%-85%

Storage Temperature

-20-55 Storage Humidity 20%-93%

Power Adapter AC 100~240V; DC 12V Output Power (maximum) 36W Battery (Type) Lithium rechargeable battery Voltage 7.4V Port Standard LAN Audio Port USB Port LAN Type: 10/100Base-T Wireless Card: 802.11 b/g Headphone Port, Speaker, Built-in Microphone, Microphone Port USB-A Port(x3)USB2.0 33 SD Card Port Support SD/MMC/MS Card Express Card Port Express Card/34 VGA Port D-15 Output Physical Features Weight No battery About 1.1Kg With battery About 1.3Kg Dimension 253*189*36.0mm Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. The # symbol means that the item is optional. 34

 

 

SAMSUNG User Guide Chapter 1. Getting Started Product Features Before You Start Contents Safety Precautions Proper Posture During Computer Use Important Safety Information Replacement Parts and Accessories Regulatory Compliance Statements WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION Overview Turning the Computer On and Off 2 3 7 8 24 27 30 33 48 50 55 Product Features PC in Hand

 Improved portability through its compact size and light-weight design

 Slim, Polished Design Small but Powerful PC

 An Intel Atom Processor with Low Power Consumption and Low Heat

 Extended Use Time through the use of Power-

Efcient Parts Versatile and Convenient Use

 A Camera Module for Video Chatting or Conferencing (Optional)

 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Function (Optional)

 Multi Card Slot Support

 Easy-to-Use Keyboard Optional items may be changed or may not be provided depending on the computer model. 2 Before You Start Before reading the User Guide, rst check the following information. User Guide Information This product is supplied with an Installation Guide, and a User Guide. You can even more easily and conveniently use the computer by using any of the guides depending on your needs. Installation Guide This guide is provided so that you can conveniently refer to this guide when using the computer for the rst time after purchasing it. This document includes the computer components and the connection procedures. User Guide You are currently reading the User Guide. To open the le at any time, double-click the icon on the Desktop. Alternatively, select Start > All Programs > Samsung

> User Guide > User Guide. This document includes the computer functions, how to use the functions, and how to use the programs. Utilizing the User Guide

Be sure to read the Safety Precautions before using the computer.

Refer to the separately supplied Installation Guide when installing your computer.

Refer to the User Guide for the procedures to use the computer.

Using the Index of the User Guide, you can easily nd any information you are looking for.

Using the Glossary of the User Guide, you can easily nd meanings for technical terms.

If a problem occurs, refer to the Q & A included in the User Guide.

 Optional items, some devices and software referred to in the User Guide may not be provided and/or changed by upgrade. Note that the computer environment referred in the User Guide may not be the same as your own environment. 3

 Images used in this User Guide may differ from actual product.

 This guide describes procedures for using both the mouse and the touchpad.

 The illustrations provided in this guide assume that your operating system is Windows XP. These illustrations are subject to change.

 The User guide supplied with this computer may vary depending on your model. Safety Precaution Notations Icon Notation Warning Caution Text Notations Icon Notation Description Failing to follow instructions marked with this symbol, may cause personal injury and or fatality. Failing to follow instructions marked with this symbol, may cause slight injury to yourself or damage your property. Description Note Caution Before You Start Content included in this section includes information required before using a function. Content included in this section includes information required about the function. Content included in this section includes helpful information to use the function. This notation represents the page number you can refer to for information about related functions or as a reference. This represents a menu path to run a program. Click the Start button and then select All Programs > Samsung

> User Guide > User Guide in this order from the menu. XX Start > All Programs

> Samsung > User Guide > User Guide 4 Copyright 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. owns the copyright of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without the consent of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. The information in this document is subject to change without notice due to improving the performance of the product. Samsung Electronics shall not be liable for any data loss. Please take care to avoid losing any important data and backup your data to prevent any such data loss. Precautions for Operating System Support If a problem occurs because of the reinstallation of other operating systems(OS) or a previous version of a OS pre-installed on this computer, or a software that does not support the OS, the company will not provide technical support, a replacement or refund, and if our service engineer visits you due to this problem, a service charge will be applied. Performance Restrictions

Online games and some games(3D,2D) may not be supported and Full HD video and some high bit rate HD video playback may be slow and stutter on this computer.

There is one memory slot provided on this computer. It supports 2GB memory max. To upgrade to 2GB memory, replace the current memory with a 2GB memory module. 5 About the Product Capacity Representation Standard About HDD Capacity Representation The capacity of the storage device (HDD, SSD) of the manufacturer is calculated assuming that 1KB=1,000 Bytes. However, the operating system (Windows) calculates the storage device capacity assuming that 1KB=1,024 Bytes, and therefore the capacity representation of the HDD in Windows is smaller than the actual capacity due to the difference in capacity calculation.

(E.g. For a 80GB HDD, Windows represents the capacity as 74.5GB, 80x1,000x1,000x1,000 byte/(1,024x1,024x1,024)byte = 74.505GB) In addition, the capacity representation in Windows may be even smaller because some programs such as Recovery Solution may reside in a hidden area of the HDD. About Memory Capacity Representation The memory capacity reported in Windows is less than the actual capacity of memory. This is because BIOS or a video adapter uses a portion of memory or claims it for further use.

(E.g. For 1GB(=1,024MB) memory installed, Windows may report the capacity as 1,022MB or less) 6 Contents Chapter 1. Getting Started 2 Product Features 3 Before You Start 7 Contents Safety Precautions 8 Proper Posture During Computer Use 24 27 Important Safety Information 30 Replacement Parts and Accessories Regulatory Compliance Statements 33 48 WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION 50 Overview Turning the Computer On and Off 55 Chapter 2. Using the Computer Keyboard Touchpad External-type CD drive

(To be purchased) Multi Card Slot Connecting a monitor / TV Adjusting the Volume Chapter 3. Using Microsoft 65 67 70 74 58 61 Windows XP About Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Screen Layout Control Panel Chapter 4. Using the Network Wired Network Wireless Network 78 80 84 90 93 7 130 131 99 103 117 121 123 125 Using the Easy Network Manager

(Optional) Bluetooth (Optional) Chapter 5. Using Applications Introducing Programs CyberLink YouCam (Optional) Samsung Update Plus (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) Using Samsung Magic Doctor

(Optional) Reinstalling Software (Optional) Chapter 6. Settings and Upgrade LCD Brightness Control BIOS Setup Setting a Boot Password Changing the Boot Priority Upgrading Memory Battery Using the Security Lock Port Chapter 7. Appendix Reinstalling Windows XP (Optional) 156 Using Samsung Recovery Solution

(Optional) Questions and Answers Product Specications Glossary Index 134 136 140 143 144 146 154 161 170 190 202 206 Safety Precautions For your security and to prevent damage, please read the following safety instructions carefully. Since this is commonly applied to Samsung Computers, some gures may differ from actual product. Warning Failing to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Installation Related Keep a distance of 15cm or more between the computer and the wall and do not place any objects between them. This may increase the internal temperature of the computer and may cause an injury. Do not install the computer on a slant or a place prone to vibrations, or avoid using the computer in that location for a long time. This increases the risk that a malfunction or damage to the product will occur. Do not install the product in places exposed to humidity such as a bathrooms. There is a danger of electric shock. Use the product within the operating conditions specied in the Manufacturers User Guide. Keep the plastic bags out of the reach of children. There is a danger of suffocation. 8 N/P Ver 1.5 Avoid exposing any part of your body to the heat from the computer vent or AC adapter for a long time when the computer is on. Exposing a part of your body close to the heat from the vent or AC adapter for long periods of time may cause a burn. Avoid blocking the vent at the bottom or side of the computer when using it on a bed or cushion. If the vent is blocked, there is a danger of damaging the computer or overheating the inside of the computer. 9 Power Related The power plug and wall outlet gures may differ depending on the country specications and the product model. Do not touch the main plug or power cord with wet hands. There is a danger of electric shock. Do not exceed the standard capacity

(voltage/current) of a multi-plug or power outlet extension when using it for the product. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard.

If the power cord or power outlet makes a noise, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and contact a service center. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard. Plug the power cord rmly into the power outlet and AC adapter. Failing to do so may cause re hazard. Do not bend the power cord excessively or do not place a heavy object over the power cord. It is especially important to keep the power cord out of reach of infants and pets. If the cord is damaged, it may cause electric shock or re. Do not use a damaged or loose main plug or power cord or power outlet. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard. Do not unplug the power cord out by pulling the cable only. If the cord is damaged, it may cause electric shock. 10 AC Adapter Usage Precautions Connect the power cord to the AC adapter rmly. Otherwise, there is a danger of re due to an incomplete contact. If water or another substance enters the power input jack, AC adapter or the computer, disconnect the power cord and contact the service center. Damage to the device within the computer may cause electric shock or re hazard. Do not place heavy objects or step onto the power cord or AC adapter to avoid damaging the power cord or AC adapter. If the cord is damaged, there is a danger of electric shock or re. Use only the AC adapter supplied with the product. Using another adapter may cause the screen to icker. 11 Battery Usage Related Keep the battery out of the reach of infants and pets, as they could put the battery into their mouths. There is a danger of electric shock or choking. Authorized Parts Use an authorized battery and AC adapter only. Please use an authorized battery and adapter approved by Samsung Electronics. Unauthorized batteries and adapters may not meet the proper safety requirements and may cause problems or malfunctions and result in an explosion or re. 12 Do not use the computer in a badly ventilated location such as on bedding, on a pillow or cushion, etc, and do not use it in a location such as room with oor heating as it may cause the computer to overheat. Take care that the computer vents (on the side or the bottom) are not blocked especially in these environments. If the vents are blocked, the computer may overheat and it may cause a computer problem, or even an explosion. Do not use the computer in a humid location such as a bathroom or sauna. Please use the computer within the recommended temperature and humidity range (10~32C, 20~80%

RH). Power Off Do not close the LCD panel and put the computer into your bag to move it when it is still turned on. If you put the computer into your bag without turning it off, the computer may overheat and there is a danger of re. Shut the computer down properly before moving it. Never heat the battery or put the battery into a re. Do not put or use the battery in a hot location such as a sauna, inside a vehicle exposed to the heat, and so on. There is a danger of an explosion or re. 13 Take care not to allow metal objects such as a key or clip to touch the battery terminal (metal parts). If a metal object touches the battery terminals, it may cause excessive current ow and it may damage the battery, or result in a re. If liquid leaks out of the battery or there is a funny smell coming from the battery, remove the battery from the computer and contact a service center. There is a danger of an explosion or re. To use the computer safely, replace a dead battery with a new, authorized battery. Please charge the battery fully before using the computer for the rst time. 14 Usage Related Disconnect all cables connected to the computer before cleaning it. If you are cleaning a notebook computer, remove the battery. There is a danger of electric shock or damage to the product. Do not connect a phone line connected to a digital phone to the modem. There is a danger of a electric shock, re or damage to the product. Do not place any container lled with water or chemicals over or near the computer. If water or chemicals enter the computer, this may cause re or electric shock. 15 If the computer is broken or dropped, disconnect the power cord and contact a service center for a safety check. Using a broken computer may cause electric shock or re hazard. Avoid direct sunlight when the computer is in an air-tight location such as inside a vehicle. There is a danger of a re hazard. The computer may overheat and also present opportunity to thieves. Upgrade Related Never disassemble the power supply or AC adapter. There is a danger of electric shock. When removing the RTC (Real Time Clock) battery, keep it out of the reach of children as they could touch and/or swallow it. There is a danger of choking. If a child has swallowed it, contact a doctor immediately. Use only authorized parts (multi-plug, battery and memory) and never disassemble parts. There is a danger of damaging the product, electric shock or re hazard. Shut down the computer and disconnect all cables before disassembling the computer. If there is a modem, disconnect the phone line. If you are disassembling a notebook computer, make sure to remove the battery. Failing to do so, may cause electric shock. 16 Custody and Movement Related Follow the instructions for the relevant location (e.g. airplane, hospital, etc.) when using a wireless communication device (wireless LAN, Bluetooth, etc.). When carrying the notebook computer with other items, such as the adapter, mouse, books etc, take care not to press anything against the notebook computer. If a heavy object is pressed against the notebook computer, a white spot or stain may appear on the LCD. Therefore, take care not to apply any pressure to the notebook. In this case, place the notebook computer in a separate compartment away from the other objects. 17 Caution Failing to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. Installation Related Do not block the ports

(holes), vents, etc. of the product and do not insert objects. Damage to a component within the computer may cause electric shock or re. When using the computer with it lying on its side, place it so that the vents face upwards. Failing to do so, may cause the internal temperature of the computer to rise and the computer to malfunction or halt. Do not place a heavy object over the product. This may cause a problem with the computer. In addition, the object may fall and cause injury, or damage the computer. Battery Usage Related Dispose of worn-out batteries properly. There is a danger of re or explosion. The battery disposal method may differ depending on your country and region. Dispose of the used battery in an appropriate way. Do not throw or disassemble the battery and do not put it into water. This may cause an injury, re or explosion. 18 Use only a battery authorized by Samsung Electronics. Failing to do so may cause an explosion. Avoid contact with metal objects such as car keys or clips when keeping or carrying a battery. Contact with a metal may cause excessive current and a high temperature and may damage the battery or cause a re. Charge the battery according to the instructions in the manual. Failing to do so, may cause an explosion or re from damage to the product. Do not heat the battery or expose it to heat (e.g. inside a vehicle during the summer). There is a danger of explosion or re. 19 Usage Related Do not place a candle, light cigar, etc. over or on the product. There is a danger of re. Use a wall outlet or multi-plug with a grounding part. Failing to do so may cause an electric shock hazard. Make sure to have the product tested by a safety service engineer after repairing the product. Authorized Samsung Repair Centers will carry out safety checks after a repair. Using a repaired product without testing it for safety may cause an electric shock or re. In case of lightning, immediately turn the system off, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and phone line from modem. Do not use a modem or phone. There is a danger of electric shock or re. Do not use your computer and AC-

Adapter on your lap or soft surfaces. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself. Connect only permitted devices to the connectors or ports of the computer. Failing to do so, may cause electric shock and re. Close the LCD panel only after checking if the notebook computer is turned off. The temperature may rise and it may cause overheating and deformation of the product. Do not press the Eject Button while the Floppy Disk/CD-ROM drive is in operation. You might lose data and the disk might be suddenly ejected and could cause an injury. Take care not to drop the product while using it. This may cause personal injury or loss of data. Do not touch the antenna with electricity facility such as the power outlet. There is a danger of electric shock. When handling computer parts, follow the instructions on the manual supplied with the parts. Failing to do so, may cause damage to the product. If the computer emits smoke, or there is a burning smell, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet and contact a service center. If your computer is a notebook computer, make sure to remove the battery. There is a danger of re. 20 Do not use a damaged or modied CD/Floppy Disk. There is a danger of damaging the product or personal injury. Do not insert your ngers into the PC Card Slot. There is a danger of injury or electric shock. Use recommended computer cleansing solution when cleaning the product and only use the computer when it is completely dried. Failing to do so may cause electric shock or re. Emergency disk eject method using paperclip should not be used while the disk is in motion. Make sure to use the emergency disk eject method only when the Optical Disk Drive is stopped. There is a danger of injury. Do not place your face close to the Optical Disk Drive tray when it is operating. There is a danger of injury due to an abrupt ejection. Check CDs for cracks and damage prior to use. It may damage the disc and cause disorder of device and injury of user. Upgrade Related Take care when touching the product or parts. The device may be damaged or you may be injured. Take care to handle internal components with care. This may cause injury or damage to the product. Make sure to close the computer cover before connecting the power after a reassembly. There is a danger of electric shock if your body touches an internal part. 21 Use parts authorized by Samsung Electronics only. Failing to do so, may cause re or damage the product. Never disassemble or repair the product by yourself. There is a danger of electric shock or re. To connect a device that is not manufactured or authorized by Samsung Electronics, enquire at your service center before connecting the device. There is a danger of damaging the product. Custody and Movement Related When moving the product, turn the power off and separate all connected cables rst. The product might be damaged or users may trip over the cables. Do not operate or watch the computer while driving a vehicle. There is a danger of a trafc accident. Please concentrate on driving. For long periods of not using the notebook computer, discharge the battery and preserve as it is detached. The battery will be preserved at its best condition. 22 Cautions on Preventing Data Loss (Hard Disk Management) Take care not to damage the data on a hard disk drive. A hard disk drive is sensitive to external impact that an external impact may cause loss of data on the surface of the disk. Take extra care, because moving the computer or an impact on the computer when it is turned on may damage the data of the hard disk drive. The company is not liable for any loss of any data caused by a customers careless usage or bad environmental conditions. Causes that may damage the data of a hard disk drive and the hard disk drive itself. The data may be lost when an external impact is applied to the disk while disassembling or assembling the computer. The data may be lost when the computer is turned off or reset by a power failure while the hard disk drive is operating. The data may be lost and irrecoverable due to a computer virus infection. The data may be lost if the power is turned off while running a program. Moving or causing an impact to the computer while the hard disk drive is operating, may cause les to be corrupted or bad sectors on the hard disk. To prevent data loss due to damage to the hard disk drive, please backup your data frequently. 23 Proper Posture During Computer Use Maintaining a proper posture during computer use is very important to prevent physical harm. The following instructions are about maintaining a proper posture during computer use developed through human engineering. Please read and follow them carefully when using the computer. Otherwise, the probability of (RSI: Repetitive Strain Injury) from repeated operations may increase and serious physical harm may be caused. The instructions in this manual have been prepared so that they can be applied within the coverage of general users. If the user is not included in the coverage, the recommendation is to be applied according to the users needs.

 Keep the center of your leg weight not on the chair but on your feet when you are sitting on a chair.

 To use the computer while talking over the telephone, use a headset. Using the computer with the phone on your shoulder is bad for posture.

 Keep frequently used items within a comfortable work range (where you can reach them with your hands). Proper Posture Adjust the heights of desks and chairs appropriate to your height. The heights are to be adjusted so that your arm forms a right angle when you place your hand over the keyboard while sitting down on a chair. Adjust the height of chair so that your heel is comfortably placed on the oor.

 Do not use the computer while you are lying down, but only while you are sitting down.

 Do not use the computer on your lap. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself.

 Work while keeping your wrist straight.

 Use a chair with a comfortable back. 24 Eye Position Keep the monitor or LCD away from your eyes by at least 50cm. Hand Position Keep your arm at a right angle as shown by the gure. c m 0 5

 Adjust the height of the monitor and the LCD screen so that its top height is equal to or lower than your eyes.

 Avoid setting the monitor and LCD excessively bright.

 Keep the line from your elbow to your hand straight.

 Do not place your palm over the keyboard while typing.

 Do not hold the mouse with excessive

 Keep the monitor and LCD screen force. clean.

 If you wear glasses, clean them before using the computer.

 When entering contents printed on a paper into the computer, use a static paper holder so that the height of the paper is almost equal to that of the monitor.

 Do not press the keyboard, touchpad or mouse with excessive force.

 It is recommended connecting an external keyboard and mouse when using the computer for long periods of time. 25 Volume Control

(Headphones and Speakers) Check your volume rst to listen to music. Use Time (Break Time)

 Take a break for 10 minutes or more after a 50-minute period when working for more than one hour. Illumination

 Do not use the computer in dark locations. The illumination level for computer use must be as bright so for reading a book.

 Indirect illumination is recommended. Use a curtain to prevent reection on the LCD screen. Operation Condition

 Do not use the computer in hot and humid locations.

 Use the computer within the allowed temperature and humidity range specied in the User Guide. Check your volume!!

 Check if the volume is too loud before using headphones.

 It is not recommended using headphones for long periods of time.

 Any deviation from the equalizer default setting could cause hearing impairment.

 The default setting can be changed through software and driver updates without your intervention. Please check the equalizer default setting before rst usage. 26 Important Safety Information Safety Instructions Your system is designed and tested to meet the latest standards for safety of information technology equipment. However, to ensure safe use of this product, it is important that the safety instructions marked on the product and in the documentation are followed. Always follow these instructions to help guard against personal injury and damage to your system. Setting Up your System

 Read and follow all instructions marked on the product and in the documentation before you operate your system. Retain all safety and operating instructions for future use.

 Do not use this product near water or a heat source such as a radiator.

 Set up the system on a stable work surface.

 The product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the rating label. 27

 Ensure that the electrical outlet you are using to power your equipment is easily accessible in case of re or short circuit.

 If your computer has a voltage selector switch, make sure that the switch is in the proper position for your area.

 Openings in the computer case are provided for ventilation. Do not block or cover these openings. Make sure you provide adequate space, at least 6 inches (15 cm), around the system for ventilation when you set up your work area. Never insert objects of any kind into the computer ventilation openings.

 Ensure that the fan vents on the bottom of the casing are clear at all times. Do not place the computer on a soft surface, doing so will block the bottom vents.

 If you use an extension cord with this system, make sure that the total power rating on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord power rating. Care During Use

 Do not walk on the power cord or allow anything to rest on it.

 Do not spill anything on the system. The best way to avoid spills is to not eat or drink near your system.

 Some products have a replaceable CMOS battery on the system board. There is a danger of explosion if the CMOS battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. If the CMOS battery requires replacement insure that a qualied technician performs the task.

 When the computer is turned off, a small amount of electrical current still ows through the computer. To avoid electrical shock, always unplug all power cables, remove the battery and modem cables from the wall outlets before cleaning the system.

 Unplug the system from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualied personnel if:

The power cord or plug is damaged. Liquid has been spilled into the system. The system does not operate properly when the operating instructions are followed. The system was dropped or the casing is damaged. The system performance changes. 28 The Instruction On Safety Operation of the NotePC

When installing and operating devices please refer to safety requirements in the user guide.

Devices can be used only with the equipment specied in the technical specications of the devices.

If any smell of burning or smoke is detected from the computer the unit should be switched off and battery removed. The unit should be checked by a qualied technician before reuse.

Service and repair of devices should be carried out by authorized service centers.

Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC Power is present). Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or eventually a burn. 29 Replacement Parts and Accessories Use only replacement parts and accessories recommended by manufacturer. To reduce the risk of re, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord. Do not use this product in areas classied as hazardous. Such areas include patient care areas of medical and dental facilities, oxygen rich environments, or industrial areas. Battery Disposal Do not put rechargeable batteries or products powered by non-removable rechargeable batteries in the garbage. Contact the Samsung Helpline for information on how to dispose of batteries that you cannot use or recharge any longer. Follow all local regulations when disposing of old batteries. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. 30 Laser Safety All systems equipped with CD or DVD drives comply with the appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825-1. The laser devices in these components are classied as Class 1 Laser Products under a US Department of Health and Human Services

(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard. Should the unit ever need servicing, contact an authorized service location.

 Laser Safety Note:

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specied in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To prevent exposure to laser beams, do not try to open the enclosure of a CD or DVD drive.

 Class 1M laser radiation when operating part is open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.

 Class 3B invisible laser radiation when open. Avoid exposure to the beam. Connect and Disconnect the AC adapter The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Do not unplug the power cord out by pulling the cable only. 31 Power Cord Requirements The power cord set (wall plug, cable and AC adapter plug) you received with your computer meets the requirements for use in the country where you purchased your equipment. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the computer. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized dealer, reseller, or service provider. General Requirements The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

 The length of the power cord set must be at least 6.00 feet (1.8m) and a maximum of 9.75 feet (3.0m).

 All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be used.

 The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 7 A and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each countrys power system.

 The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C7 connector, for mating with appliance inlet on the computer. 32 Regulatory Compliance Statements Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specic countries are listed in the specic country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualied for use in the countries identied by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The RF eld strength of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your notebook are well below all international RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your notebook) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed on the next page:

33

 Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. 802.11ABGN (also known as wireless Ethernet or Wi) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.

 In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or ammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.

 Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country.

 If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled.

 Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Please contact manufacturer for service.

 Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information. 34 United States of America USA and Canada Safety Requirements and Notices Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. Use in specic environments:

The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter

(such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modied to be qualied for such use. Use On Aircraft Caution Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-

frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency. Any changes or modication to said product not expressly approved by Intel could void the users authority to operate this device. 35

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may nd the following booklet helpful: Something About Interference. This is available at FCC local regional ofces. Our company is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specied by our company. The correction will be the responsibility of the user. Use only shielded data cables with this system. Unintentional Emitter per FCC Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

36 Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN type devices

(radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present

(embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualied for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and

/or damage this device. The power output of the wireless device

(or devices), which may be embedded in your notebook, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. 37

.

:

. . . . . FCC Part 68

(If tted with a modem device.) This equipment compiles with part of the FCC rules. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number

(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks : RJ11C An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or promises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See Installation Instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ve (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by total RENs, contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. 38 If the terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to le a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advanced notice in order for you to make necessary modications to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment (Modem) for repair or warranty information, please contact your local distributor. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The user must use the accessories and cables supplied by the manufacturer to get optimum performance from the product. No repairs may be done by the customer. This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the rst page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identication of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be any number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, refer to your communications software user manual. 39 Canada Unintentional Emitter per ICES-003 This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limitesapplicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par Industrie Canada. Intentional Emitter per RSS 210 Low power, Radio LAN type devices

(radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present

(embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualied for use in Canada if an Industry Canada ID number is on the system label. When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-

GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 40 To prevent radio interference to licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25-

to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85 GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. The power output of the wireless device

(or devices), which may be embedded in your notebook, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by Industry Canada. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except the installed Bluetooth transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 41 Users should make sure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. To avoid electrical shock or equipment malfunction do not attempt to make electrical ground connections by yourself. Contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. Telecommunications per DOC notice (for products tted with an IC-compliant modem) The Industry Canada label identies certied equipment. This certication means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certied connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certied equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. 42

 Low Voltage Directive (Safety) 73/23/

EEC as per EN 60950(A1/A2/A3/A4/

A11)

 Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC as per CTR21 (if tted with a modem device) EN 300 328 (if tted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device) EN 301 489-1 (if tted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device) EN 301 489-17 (if tted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device) EN 301 893 (if tted with a 5 GHz band embedded wireless device) European Union European Union CE Marking and Compliance Notices Products intended for sale within the European Union are marked with the Conformit Europene (CE) Marking, which indicates compliance with the applicable Directives and European standards and amendments identied below. This equipment also carries the Class 2 identier. The following information is only applicable to systems labeled with the CE mark

. European Directives This Information Technology Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the following European directives:

 EMC Directive 89/336/EEC with amending directives 92/31/EEC &

93/68/EEC as per EN 55022 Class B EN 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-3 EN 55024 43 European Radio Approval Information (for products tted with EU-approved radio devices) This Product is a Notebook computer;

low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system which is intended for home or ofce use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualied for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notied Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you notebook is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. See 802.11b and 802.11g restrictions for specic countries or regions within countries under the heading European Economic Area Restrictions below. Translated Statements of Compliance

[English]

This product follows the provisions of the European Directive 1999/5/EC.

[Danish]

Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europiske direktiv 1999/5/EC

[Dutch]

Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 1999/5/EC.

[Finnish]

Tm tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 1999/5/EC mryksi.

[French]

Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Europenne 1999/5/EC.

[German]

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EC

[Greek]

1999/5/C.

[Icelandic]

essi vara stenst regluger Evrpska Efnahags Bandalagsins nmer 1999/5/EC

[Italian]

Questo prodotto conforme alla Direttiva Europea 1999/5/EC. 44

[Norwegian]

Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 1999/5/EC.

[Portuguese]

Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Europia 1999/5/EC.

[Spanish]

Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 1999/5/EC.

[Swedish]

Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 1999/5/EC. European Economic Area Restrictions Local Restriction of 802.11b/802.11g Radio Usage

[Note to integrator: The following statements on local restrictions must be published in all end-user documentation provided with the system or product incorporating the wireless product.]

Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11b/802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11b/802.11g products are designed for use only in specic countries or regions, and are not allowed to be operated in countries or regions other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries or regions for which they were intended and for verifying that they are congured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country or region of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country or region of use could be an infringement of local law and may be punished as such. 45 France For Metropolitan departments:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.400 - 2.454 GHz (channels 1 to 7) for outdoor use. For Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor and outdoor use. For Reunion, Guyane:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz for outdoor use

(channels 5 to 13) The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. The European variant is intended for use throughout the European Economic Area. However, authorization for use is further restricted in particular countries or regions within countries, as follows:

General European standards dictate maximum radiated transmit power of 100 mW effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) and the frequency range 2400 2483.5 MHz. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Belgium The product may be used outdoors, but for outdoor transmissions over a distance of 300m or more, a license from the BIPT is required. This restriction should be indicated in the manual as follows:

Dans le cas dune utilisation prive, lextrieur dun btiment, au-dessus dun espace public, aucun enregistrement nest ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de lIBPT est requise. Pour une utilisation publique lextrieur de btiments, une licence de lIBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter lIBPT. 46 This equipment has been approved to Council Decision 98/482/EEC - CTR 21 for Pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact manufacturer Technical Support. European Telecommunication Information (for products tted with EU-approved modems) Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this equipment to the Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC. Such marking is indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards:

CTR 21 - Attachment requirements for pan-European approval for connection to the analogue Public Switched Telephone Networks (PSTNs) of TE (excluding TE supporting voice telephony services) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

(DTMF) signaling. Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect (pulse) or DTMF (tone) signaling, only the performance of the DTMF signaling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signaling for access to public or private emergency services. DTMF signaling also provides faster call setup. 47 WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION Correct disposal of this product

(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems.) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government ofce, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. 48 Correct disposal of batteries in this product Pb

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. USA ONLY This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Maganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA. Perchlorate Material- special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws. For details see lamprecycle.org, eise.org, or call 1-800-Samsung. 49 Overview Front View

 Optional items may be changed or may not be provided depending on the computer model.

 The actual color and appearance of the computer may differ from the pictures used in this guide. 9 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 Buttons 1 Camera Lens (Optional) Using this lens, you can take still pictures and record video. 2 Power Button 3 Keyboard 4 Touchpad/Touchpad 5 Multi Card Slot 6 Status Indicators Turns the computer on and off. 55 A device to enter data by pressing the keys. 58 The touchpad and touchpad buttons provide functions similar to the mouse ball and buttons. 61 A card slot that supports SD Card, SDHC and MMC. 65 Shows the operating status of the computer. The corresponding operating LED is lit when the corresponding function operates. 51 A device used to generate sound. The screen images are displayed here. You can use the built-in microphone. 7 Speaker 8 LCD 9 Microphone 50

 

 

Status Indicators 3 Scroll Lock 4 HDD/

SSD 5 Wireless LAN 6 Charge Status 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Num Lock 2 Caps Lock This turns on when the Num Lock key is pressed and numeric keypad is activated. 59 This turns on when the Caps Lock key is pressed allowing capital letters to be typed without holding the Shift button down. 7 Power 51 This turns on when the Scroll Lock key is pressed and screen scroll is locked. 59 This turns on when the hard disk or SSD(Solid State Disk) is being accessed. This turns on when the wireless LAN is operating. This shows the power source and the battery charge status. Green: When the battery is fully charged or the battery is not installed. Amber: When the battery is being charged. Off: When the computer is running on battery power without being connected to AC adapter. This shows the computer operating status. On: When the computer is operating. Blinks: When the computer is in Sleep mode. Right View 1 2 3 1 USB Port 2 Monitor Port 3 DC Jack You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a keyboard/mouse, digital camera, etc. A port used to connect a monitor, TV or projector supporting a 15pin D-SUB interface. 70 A jack to connect the AC adapter that supplies power to the computer. 52 Left View 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Security Lock Port You can connect a Kensington lock to the Security Lock Port to 2 Chargeable USB Port prevent the computer from being stolen. You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a keyboard/mouse, digital camera, etc. (Chargeable USB: You can charge USB devices through the USB port even when the computer is turned off.)

 Charging a device through a Chargeable USB takes longer than using a regular charger.

 Press the F2 key when the Samsung logo appears in the booting sequence to enter the BIOS Setup, select Advanced > USB Charge In Sleep Mode, and set it to Enable. Then you can use the Chargeable USB Port feature even in sleep mode. 3 Wired LAN Port 4 Fan Vents Connect the Ethernet cable to this port. 90 The internal heat of the computer is emitted through these holes. If the vents are blocked the computer may overheat. Avoid blocking the vents as this may be dangerous. 5 Microphone Jack A jack used to connect the microphone. 6 Headphone Jack A jack used to connect the headphones. 53 Bottom View 1 2 3 1 Battery 2 Battery Latches 3 Memory Compartment Cover This is a Lithium-Ion rechargeable battery that supplies power to the computer. 146 The latch used to remove or install the battery. 147 The main memory is installed inside the cover. 144 54 Turning the Computer On and Off 4 Power button LED is lit while the computer is turned on. LED

 When running the computer on battery power, the LCD brightness is dimmed automatically to save battery power. Press the Fn +

key to increase the LCD brightness. 60

 When turning the computer on for the rst time, the Register Windows screen appears. You can use the computer after registering your user information. Turning the computer on 1 Install the battery and connect the AC adapter.

(Refer to the Installation Guide.) 2 Lift the LCD panel up. 3 Press the Power button to turn the computer on. 55 Turning the computer off 1 Click the Start 2 Click Turn Off Computer. button on the taskbar. 3 Click Turn Off.

 If the computer has not turned off properly due to a system error, press

<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete>. When [Windows Task Manager] dialog box appears, click Shut Down > Turn Off to turn off the computer. Your unsaved work may be lost/

damaged.

 If <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete> keys do not operate either, press the power button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the computer. Your unsaved work may be lost/

damaged. The next time you turn on your computer, a hard disk check will be performed, before Windows starts. 56 Chapter 2. Using the computer Keyboard Touchpad External-type CD drive (To be purchased) Multi Card Slot Connecting a monitor / TV Adjusting the Volume 58 61 65 67 70 74 Keyboard Shortcut key functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections.

 The keyboard is supplied according to the corresponding country.

 The keyboard image and color may differ from the actual keyboard. Shortcut Keys You can use the following functions by pressing the keys below with the Fn key. Fn+

Name REST

(Sleep Mode) Gauge Euro CRT/LCD Backlight Mute Samsung Magic Doctor Function Switches to Sleep mode. To wake the computer up, press the Power button. Shows the remaining battery charge. You can only use this function when the Easy Display Manager program is installed. Enters the Euro monetary unit symbol. This key may not be provided depending on the keyboard type. Switches the screen output to the LCD or external monitor when an external monitor (or TV) is connected to the computer. 71 Turns the LCD backlight on or off. Mutes or cancels mute. System diagnosis, recovery and Internet consultation program, Samsung Magic Doctor, will be launched. 58 Fn+

Name Function Easy SpeedUp Manager You can select operation mode when you need maximum system performance or low-noise/low power consumption with one-click.

 Silent: Low-noise and low power consumption mode

 Normal: Normal Mode

 Speed: Maximum performance mode. The system operates in its maximum performance, and system resources are allocated to the currently active program with priority for maximum performance.

 For Windows XP model, Easy SpeedUp Manager function is provided in Magic Keyboard program. If you reinstall Windows XP, you have to install the Magic Keyboard program additionally using the System Software Media in order to use this function.

 If you dont want fan noise turning ON and OFF in the Silent mode, select the Advanced menu > Fan Silent Mode > Low in the BIOS Setup. The fan keeps turning ON and works in Low noise mode. Wireless LAN Turns the wireless LAN function on or off in models with wireless Touchpad Num Lock Scroll Lock LAN capability. Turns the Touchpad function on or off. When using an external mouse only, you can turn the Touchpad off. Turns the numeric keyboard on or off. If you turn the Scroll Lock on, you can scroll the screen up or down without changing the cursor location in some applications. 59 Screen Brightness Control To adjust the LCD brightness press the Fn +

combination. The changed screen brightness is displayed at the center of the screen for a moment. key combination or the Fn +

key Volume Control To control the volume, press the Fn +

combination. You can mute the sound or cancel the mute function by pressing the Fn +

combination. key combination or the Fn +

key key Numeric Key The numbers are printed in blue on the numeric keys. If Num Lock is turned on by pressing the Fn +

numeric keys to enter digits. key combination, you can use the Other Function Keys Application Key Performs the right-click mouse function (touchpad). 60 Touchpad The touchpad provides the same function as a mouse and the left and right buttons of the touchpad plays the role of the left and right buttons of a mouse.

 Use the Touchpad with your ngers. Using a sharp object may damage the Touchpad.

 If you touch the Touchpad or press the Touchpad buttons while booting up, the Windows boot time may be extended. Touchpad Use to move the cursor. Touchpad Left Button You can select or run a program using this button. Basic Touchpad Functions Moving the cursor on the screen Place your nger on the touchpad slightly and move your nger. The mouse cursor will move accordingly. Move your nger in the direction you wish to move the cursor. Scroll Area Plays the role of the mouse wheel. You can scroll up and down using the Scroll Area. Touchpad Right Button Plays the role of the right mouse button. Click Function Place your nger on the touchpad and tap your nger once over an item you want. Alternatively, press the left touchpad button once. Tap or Click 61 Double-Click Function Put your nger on the touchpad and quickly tap twice with your nger on an item you want. Alternatively, press the left touchpad button twice quickly. Drag Function Dragging refers to moving an item to another place after selecting it. Press and hold down the left touchpad button over an item you want to drag and move the item to the new location. TapTap ClickClick or Holding down the left touchpad button Move Right Button Function This corresponds to clicking the right mouse button. Press the right touchpad button once. The corresponding pop-up menu appears. Touchpad Scroll Function The touchpad scroll area provides the mouse wheel function (scroll function). Place your nger on the touchpads right edge for vertical scrolling or the bottom edge for horizontal scrolling and then move your nger along the edge to scroll the screen vertically or horizontally. Click 62 Touchpad Gesture Function You can use the following Gesture function with the touchpad.

 A scrolling function using the circle.

 Image and text zoom-in and zoom-out functions using two ngers

 A long distance cursor movement function Chiral Scroll Function The Chiral Scroll function enables users to scroll long horizontally and vertically. If you place your nger over the Scroll Area at the bottom right of the touchpad and move your nger slightly, the mouse pointer changes to the circle icon At this time, circle clockwise or counterclockwise over the touchpad with your nger to scroll long. Image and Text Zoom-In and Zoom-

Out (Pinch) Function If you place two ngers over the touchpad and set them close or apart, the image or text is zoomed-in or zoomed-out. Zoom-In Zoom-Out or Scroll Area 63 Cursor Long-Distance Movement (Momentum/Glide) Function You can move the cursor quickly and smoothly a long distance with a small movement over the touchpad. To use this function, congure as follows. Click the Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse > Device Settings tab > Settings button, select the Momentum > Enable Momentum option in the Touchpad Setting window, and click the OK button. Disabling the Gesture Function 1 Click the Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse >

2 When Touchpad Settings window appears, deselect the option you want to disable Device Settings tab > Settings button. in Select an item click the OK button. Touchpad On/Off Function If you want to use the mouse only without using the touchpad, you can turn the touchpad off. To lock the touchpad function, press the Fn +

keys. 64 External-type CD drive (To be purchased) This computer supports an external USB CD-ROM drive (can be additionally purchased). Check if the interface type of the external CD-ROM drive is a USB type. For detailed specications, refer to the catalog. The following types of external CD drives exist. Drive Type DVD-ROM DVD-Combo You can read CDs and DVDs, and burn a CD. Reads CD/DVD. Function DVD Super Multi You can read CDs and DVDs, and burn CDs and DVDs. Supported DVD recording types include DVDR, DVDRW, DVD-

RAM. The appearance and color of the external-type CD drive may differ from the actual appearance and color depending on the CD drive model.

 Do not insert a cracked or scratched CD. Otherwise, the CD may break and damage the optical disk drive when the CD rotates at a high speed.

 When you clean a CD or DVD title, wipe with a soft cloth from inside to outside.

 Do not eject a CD when the CD operating LED is on. Connecting the CD Drive Connect the CD drive to the USB port. USB port 65 Inserting and Ejecting a CD 1 Press the Eject button of the CD drive.

 A CD drives reading and writing speed may differ depending on the condition and type of the media.

 To eject a CD when the CD drive does not work or the computer is off, place the end of a paper clip

(

) into the Emergency Hole until the CD tray is ejected. Status Indicator Emergency Hole Eject Button 2 When the CD tray opens, insert a CD or DVD and push the tray in until it clicks. 3 Push the CD tray inward until it clicks. The CD drive status indicator is turned on. 66 Multi Card Slot Using the multi card slot, you can read and write data to a SD card, SDHC card, MMC. You can use a card as a removable disk and conveniently exchange data with digital devices such as a digital camera, digital camcorder, MP3, etc.

 You have to additionally purchase a multi card with the necessary capacity depending on your requirements.

 You can use a multi card just like any data storage device. A copyright protection function is not supported.

 Since you can lose a card when moving the computer, keep the card separately.

 Before use, remove the dummy card that was inserted to protect the slot. Supported Cards SD Card SDHC Card MMC 67 To Insert and Use a Memory Card 1 Insert a card into the slot according to the directions printed on the slot. 3 You can save, move and delete data by double-clicking the corresponding drive. Example) SD Card 2 The card drive appears. Click Open folder and view les. If the window does not appear, click Start > My Computer. The device name of the card drive may differ depending on your computer model. Since you can only use the card after formatting it, if it is not formatted, format the card referring to the descriptions of To format a memory card. 69 Using a Mini SD snd RS-MMC Since the above cards are too small, you cannot insert the cards into the slot directly. Insert the card into the dedicated adapter (available from most electronic retailers) and then insert the adapter into the multi card slot. However, depending on the adapters body material, some RS-MMC cards may not be recognized properly. Samsung recommend that you check the card is recognized correctly prior to purchasing. 68

 To use a card to exchange data with a digital device such as a digital camera, formatting the data using the digital device is recommended.

 When you try to use a card, which is formatted in the computer, in another digital device, you may have to format the card again in the device.

 You cannot format, write or delete data from a SD, or SDHC card with a write protection tab when it is in the Lock position.

 Inserting and removing a memory card repeatedly may damage the memory card. To remove a memory card 1 Take hold of the end of the card and remove the card. To format a memory card When using the memory card for the rst time, you must format the card before using it. Formatting a card deletes all data saved on the card. If the card includes data, backup the data before formatting it. 1 Click Start > My computer. 2 Right-click over a card drive with the 3 Click Start to the formatting. touchpad and select Format. 69 Connecting a monitor / TV Using an external display device is useful when you are giving a presentation or watching a video or movie through your monitor. Extra cable will be required. Connecting to the Monitor / TV Connect the computer to the RGB port of the monitor or TV using a monitor cable

(15-pin). 70 Viewing Through a Monitor / TV You can switch the display device using the shortcut key.

 LCD: Notebook Screen

 CRT: External Monitor Screen

 LCD+CRT Clone : Notebook+

External Monitor Screen

 LCD+CRT DualView: Notebook+

External Monitor Screen in Dual View

 What is Dual View?

Dual View is a function that enables you to view a computer screen over two display devices. It is convenient when you need a wide screen. External Monitor / TV is not supported in the DOS Command Prompt window. key combination Switching the Display Device using the Shortcut Key Press the Fn +

once. Then the Easy Display Manager screen appears in which you can select a display device. Whenever you press the key while holding down the Fn key, the selected option is changed. Example) Selecting LCD+CRT Dual View 71 Using Dual View to View Extended Screen Dual View is a function that enables you to view a computer screen over two display devices. This is convenient when needing a wide screen for work. In Dual View mode, you can select the screen resolution and color quality for each display device, as if there were two separate graphics cards. 1 Connect the external display device

(e.g. a monitor or a projector) to the corresponding port of the system. To connect a TV, connect the TV to the TV output port of the system. 2 Press touchpad right button on the desktop, click Properties, and then click the Settings tab. 3 Click the monitor 2 icon, select the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box, and then click Apply. 72 Deactivating Dual View Mode Click the monitor 2 icon, clear the Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box, and then click Apply. To move a window between display devices in Dual View mode Click the title bar of the window in the primary display device (1, the LCD), and drag it to the secondary display device (2). The window is moved to the secondary display device. 4 When the conguration is complete, click Identify on the left side of Troubleshoot. The primary display device(the LCD) is indicated as 1, and the secondary display device is indicated as 2. Now you can view the screen through two monitors. 1 : Primary 2 : Secondary

 When you use Dual View, conguring the LCD as the

'Primary' monitor is recommended.

 If the screen of the secondary display device is displayed at 1024x768 pixels, with 32bit colors, change the settings to the desired screen resolution and color quality in the [Display Properties] dialog box. 73 Adjusting the Volume You can adjust the volume using the keyboard and the volume control program. Adjusting the Volume using the Keyboard Press the Fn +

Fn +

volume. Press the Fn +

turn the volume on or off. key combination or key combination to adjust the key combination to For advanced volume control options, double-click the Volume icon

, and adjust the volume level in the volume control program. Adjusting the Volume using the Volume Adjustment Program Click the Volume icon on the taskbar and slide the volume control bar to adjust the volume. When you turn the system on, a booting noise may occur. Mute 74

 WOW XT (Music): Select to listen to music.

 TruSurround XT (Movie/Video):

Select to watch a movie.

 The SRS function is only supported for a computers built-in speakers.

 It is recommended uncheking the SRS option before recording, and checking it before play. It is to prevent sound distortion because of double application of SRS effect when user plays the le recorded by using stereo mix. Using SRS The SRS function enables you to experience more stereophonic sound by expanding the space-perception through the stereo speaker. This function is available for specic models only. 1 Click Start > Control Panel >

Sound, Speech and Audio Devices

> SRS Control Panel. 2 Check the Enable checkbox and select a mode. Then you can listen to sound through the selected SRS effect. 75 Using Recorders This section describes how to perform recording on a computer by using Windows Recorder. microphone jack. You can also use the internal MIC. 1 Connect a microphone to the 2 Click Start > Control Panel >

Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. then, click Options > Properties. 3 Click Advanced from Volume and 4 Select Realtek HD Audio input from the mixer device to select Recording from Adjust Volume for. 5 Select Mic Volume from Show the following volume controls and click OK. 6 When Recording Control window appears, check the Select checkbox. Increase the recording volume to increase the recording sensitivity and close the window. 7 Click Start > All Programs >

Accessories > Entertainment >

Sound Recorder. 8 Click the Record button to perform recording. The default recording duration of Windows is 60 seconds. Download a dedicated recording program from the Internet to record audio data for a long time. 76 Chapter 3. Using Microsoft Windows XP About Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Screen Layout Control Panel 78 80 84 The screen shots used in this chapter may differ from actual screens depending on the Windows XP version and model. About Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP (hereinafter referred to as Windows) is the basic operating system for computers. You should know how to use Windows in order to use your computer properly. Use Tour Windows XP as well as Help and Support to learn about how to use Windows. Tour Windows XP Tour Windows XP introduces the basic features and characteristics of Windows. Click Start > Tour Windows XP. Or, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Tour Windows XP. Click the title at the right to view the description of the Windows features. The screen layout may differ depending on the computer model and the operating system. Click the title. 78 Help and Support Help and Support allows you to view the features and usage of Windows. Also, it allows you to search the information you want by entering a search keyword. Click Start > Help and Support. Search: Enter a search keyword to view the Help. Fixing a problem: If a problem occurs, you can get help. 79 Windows XP Screen Layout Desktop If you turn on the computer, the Desktop will appear. The Desktop is the work space

(screen) of a computer and is congured as follows:

The screen layout may differ depending on the computer model and the operating system. Shortcut Icons You can launch programs by clicking the shortcut icons on the Desktop. Start Menu The menu from which you can launch programs. Start button Press the start button. The Start menu appears. Recycle Bin You can drop useless les and folders here. Language Bar Switches text input language. Taskbar Currently running programs are displayed here. 80 System Tray with Clock Shows some running program icons. Icons not being used are hidden. If you click the arrow mark on the left, you can view hidden icons. Start Menu The menu from which you can launch programs. Click Start. The Start menu appears. Alternatively, press the Windows key on the keyboard. User account name Items that are pined to the Start menu. Frequently used programs All Programs My Documents folder My Computer Control Panel Help and Support Search Run My Computer Control Panel Help and Support Search Run Displays the contents of the hard disk, the CD-ROM drive, the network drive(s), and oppy disks. It can also be used to search and open les and folders. Enables users to congure settings on the computer. Provides on-line help, information on Windows and troubleshooting. Enables users to search for information in les or the Internet. Run programs or documents. 81 Window A window is a basic foundation for operating your computer. For instance, a window of your computer is congured as follows:

Click Start > My Computer. Displayed menus and names may be varied. Double-click the Local Disk, which is a hard disk drive, to view the folders and les saved in your computer. If any folder or le is not shown, click Show Folder Contents. Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Fast Operation Window Minimize button Close button Maximize button Folder Icon Drive Icon 82 What is a Drive?

A drive is a storage device that can read or write data such as folders and les. What is a Folder?

A folder is just like a cabinet that keeps les or folders. You can keep les or folders of similar kinds in a folder. What is a File?

A le is the minimum unit of materials created by using a program and is also called data. How to View the Entire Drive Structure Click the folder icon from the Toolbar to view the drive structure. Click the icon again to return to the Fast Operation window. 83 Control Panel The Control Panel has a group of tools that enable the user to congure the Windows-

related settings. Running Control Panel Click Start > Control Panel. Appearance and Themes Network and Internet Connections Add or Remove Programs Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices Performance and Maintenance Change the appearance of desktop items, apply a theme or screen saver to your computer, or customize the Start menu and Taskbar. Connect to the Internet, create a home or small ofce network, congure network settings to work from home, or change modem, phone, and Internet settings. Install or remove programs and Windows components. Change the entire sound scheme or individual sounds made by your computer, or congures the settings for your speakers and recording devices. Schedule regular maintenance checks, increase space on your hard disk, or congure energy-saving settings. 84 Click Start > Control Panel. Printers and Other Hardware User Accounts Date, Time, Language, and Regional Options Accessibility Options Security Center Change the settings for your printer, keyboard, mouse, camera, and other hardware. Change user account settings, passwords, and pictures. Change the date, time, and time zone for your computer, the language to use, and the way numbers, currencies, dates, and times are displayed. Adjust your computer settings for vision, hearing, and mobility. View your current security status and access important settings to help protect your PC. 85 User Account Windows XP allows to set multiple users with accounts. This section describes how to add a user account and to switch a it. How to Add a User Account 1 Click Start > Control Panel. 2 Click User Account and Create a new Account in sequence. 3 Enter your name and click Next. 4 Select an account type and click the Create Account button. Then, check the created account from the User Account window. 5 Click the target account and change the user account information. You can change the account name, password, account type, and picture. 86 To Delete User Account 1 Click Start > Control Panel > User Account. 2 Select the user account to be deleted and click Delete Account. How to Switch a User 1 Click Start > Logoff. 2 Click Switch User. The administrator account cannot be deleted. It can only be renamed or disabled. 3 Click the user name to be switched from the Welcome screen. Then you can log on with a new user name. 87 Changing Resolution and Color A resolution is the number of pixels displayed on the screen. If you set the resolution to a higher value, items on the screen will be displayed smaller and the screen looks wider than the pervious. As color quality gets higher, more colors can be represented. 1 Click Start > Control Panel >

Appearance and Themes > Change the screen resolution. 2 Click Settings and change the resolution and color quality. Then, click OK. Move the slider bar to set the resolution. You can select a graphic chipset. Click the pull-down menu button to select the number of colors you want. It is recommended to set the resolution and color quality depending on the LCD type of your computer as the following:

LCD Type WSVGA Resolution 1024 x 600 Color Quality highest (32-bit) 88 Chapter 4. Using the Network 90 Wired Network 93 Wireless Network Using the Easy Network Manager (Optional) 99 103 Bluetooth (Optional) Wired Network A wired network is a network environment used for a company network or broadband internet connection at home. You can also congure the network settings using the Easy Network Manager. 99 1 Connect a LAN cable to the computers LAN port. 3 Select Local Area Connection and click the right button of the touch pad and select Properties. 2 Click Start > Control Panel >

Network and Internet Connections

> Network Connection. The LAN Device name may differ depending on your computers Network Device. 90 4 Click General tab and select a LAN driver from Connect using:. Select Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) and click Properties. The displayed LAN driver may vary depending on the LAN device type. Click Install to add a network component as shown in the gure below: You can add a client, a service, or a protocol. 5 Congure IP settings. Select Obtain an IP address automatically when using DHCP. If you use a static IP, select Use the following IP address and enter the values. If the IP of your computer is not automatically assigned, contact the network administrator. 6 If all settings are made, click OK. Now the network conguration is nished. 91 Using both DHCP and a xed IP simultaneously Using the Alternate Conguration providing by Windows XP, you can set both automatic and xed IP addresses and then you can select to use either of them to connect to the Internet. 1 Click Start > Control Panel >

Network and Internet Connections

> Network Connection > Local Area Connection by using the right button of the touch pad and click Properties. and click Properties. 2 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) 3 Select the Alternate Conguration tab, select User congured and ll in the elds. 4 When the setting completes, click OK. 92 Wireless Network A wireless network allows computers to share resources or an internet connection without using LAN cables between them.

 This description is applied only to the models equipped with wireless LAN cards or devices. You can set a wireless network by using Easy Network Manager as well. 99 A wireless LAN device is optional when purchasing. Click a symbol, +, from Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System > Hardware Tab >

Device Manager > Network Adapter to check the device type. Some of the pictures shown in this description may vary depending on the wireless LAN device.

 Press the Fn +

key and enable the wireless LAN features to use wireless LAN. Once the wireless LAN is enabled, the wirelss LED turns on. Types of Wireless LAN Connections The types of wireless LAN connections are as follows. The following describes how to use the wireless LAN based on AP connections.

 AP Connections You can connect to the Internet or a computer on the network by connecting to AP on an AP-enabled network. What is Access Point (AP)?

AP is a network device that connects wired LAN to wireless LAN and corresponds to the wireless hub of a wired network. Also, AP allows you to connect more than one computer where wireless LAN is enabled. 93

 Small Ofce Network The small ofce network interconnects computers where wireless LAN is enabled wirelessly and is called Peer-

to-Peer (or Ad HOC). This method enables the conguration of a small ofce network in one computer. Then, another computer is connected to the computer wirelessly for communications. For more information on how to establish connections, see the information from Start > Help and Support > Networking and Web. When you use Ad-Hoc, you have to change the McAfee Firewall settings. 181 Connecting to Wireless LAN If an AP exists near your location, you can easily connect to wireless LAN in the method provided by Windows XP. The following description is based on Windows XP Service Pack 3; thus, the pictures may vary. 1 Click the Wireless Network Connection icon using the right button of the touch pad. Then, click View Available Wireless Networks. from the Taskbar 2 Select an AP to be connected and click Connect. If a network key is set in the AP, the network key input window will appear. Enter the network key in the input window and click OK. For a network key, contact the network administrator. 3 Once Connected to AP is displayed, you can use a wireless network. 94 To check the network connections Place the mouse on the Wireless Network Connection icon Taskbar. Then, the status will appear. from the 95 Connecting to computer-to-computer networks

(peer-to-peer or ad hoc) In computer-to-computer wireless networks, you can wirelessly connect 2 or more computers that have wireless LAN modules. Using this method, a computer that is not connected to the Internet can share the Internet by accessing another computer connected to the Internet. You can connect by completing the following steps:

 Step 1. Set up a computer-to-computer network on a computer.

 Step 2. Connect to the congured computer from other computers. Step 1. Setting up a computer-to-

computer network 1 Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon on the taskbar, and select View Available Wireless Networks. 2 Click Change the order of Preferred Networks. 3 On the Wireless Network tab, click Advanced. 96 4 Clear Automatically connect to non-default network check box, if it is selected.Select Computer-to-

computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 5 In the Wireless Networks tab, click Add. To prevent a network connection from an unauthorized user, it would be better to congure a network key (encryption key). A network key consists of 5 ~ 13 alphanumeric characters (e.g. magic), or of 10

~ 26 hexadecimal numbers (a hexadecimal number is represented by numbers 0 to 9 or letters a to f). 6 Enter the network name (e.g. samsung), and unselect The key is provided for me automatically. Enter the encryption key in the Network key eld, and click OK. 7 Check that the congured network name (e.g. samsung) is in the Preferred networks item, and click OK. 97 Step 2. Connecting to the congured computer 1 Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon on the taskbar, and select View Available Wireless Networks. 2 Select the wireless network name (e.g. samsung) specied in Connecting to computer-to-computer networks (peer-to-peer or ad hoc) on page 96, and click Connect. 3 Enter a cryptographic key in the network key box and click Connect. If the network key is not congured in Connecting to computer-to-

computer networks (peer-to-peer or ad hoc) on page 96, just click Connect, without any keystrokes. When connected to the wireless network, the system displays Connected in the selected network of the Network Connection window. Checking the connection status Move the mouse pointer over the Wireless Network Connection icon on the taskbar, and the connection status is displayed. 98 Using the Easy Network Manager Easy Network Manager is a program that helps congure the network settings. Easy Network Manager (Optional) Easy Network Manager provides the following features.

 You can easily congure the network and printer settings. 99~100

 You can immediately use the network without having to dene new network settings again after moving to another location. 101 By conguring the network settings (IP address, printer settings, etc.) for each location, you can immediately access the network without following the network setting procedures each time regardless of your location.

 You can diagnose the network status. 102 Network Settings This section describes the procedures to connect to the Internet by setting up a network. The setting up procedures include procedures to add a printer to the network. 4 Select a network location icon and enter the name of the location (e.g. Home). Click the Next button. 1 To use a wired LAN, connect the LAN cable to the LAN port. To use the wireless LAN, you have to turn the wireless LAN on rst by pressing the Fn +

If the wireless LAN is turned on, the Wireless LAN LED lights up. keys. 2 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Easy Network Manager

> Easy Network Manager. 3 Click the Add button. 99 5 Select Direct Connection and click the Next button. 6 Select the LAN device, setup the IP address and click the Next button. Select Device Select a device to be connected to the Internet. Select either Wired LAN or Wireless LAN. IP Settings To use a static IP address, ll in the elds. For the IP address information, ask your network administrator. Obtain an IP address automatically Select DHCP to use this option

(automatic IP setting). 100 7 Click Add Printer and set up a printer according to the wizard. When the printer has been added, click the Refresh button, select the newly added printer and then click the Finish button. To not add a printer, click the Finish button. 8 When the network settings are complete, the Do you want to move to the newly added location now?

message appears. Click the Cancel button. An icon for the added location is created. The network settings have been completed. If you select OK, the network settings for the added location are applied. To add a new location, repeat the procedures from Step 3 above.

 

 

Using in Another Location Another Location By configuring the network settings (IP address, printer setting, etc.) for each location, you can immediately access the network in one click, without performing the network setting procedures regardless of your location. 1 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Easy Network Manager

> Easy Network Manager when connected to the Internet. 2 Select an icon that represents the corresponding location from the Saved Locations window and then click Move. 3 If the Internet connection is a wired LAN, you can immediately load the settings for the new location and the corresponding network connection information is displayed in the Current Location Information window. To connect to a wireless LAN, select the AP Setting from the menu. The available APs are represented as icons. If you double-click an AP icon to connect to, the computer is connected to the AP through the wireless LAN and you are moved to the corresponding location. Click the AP Setting menu item at the top of the screen and double-click one of the available APs. 101 Available AP Icon PC Icon The closer to the PC icon at the bottom of the screen, the stronger the signal from the AP is, while the further from the icon, the weaker the signal strength is. If a network key is required, request the key from your network administrator. AP Setting is supported in Windows XP SP or higher and Vista only. Diagnosing the Network Status You can diagnose the network state and find solutions for why you cannot connect to the network. 1 Launch Easy Network Manager. 2 Select Diagnosis from the menu. 3 The Network Connections window appears. Click Start to start the network diagnosis. 4 When the diagnosis is complete, a device with a problem is marked by a X mark icon with a description of the problem at the bottom of the window. 10

Bluetooth (Optional) Bluetooth is a wireless communication technology that allows access to devices nearby such as a computer, mobile phone, printer, keyboard or mouse without a cable connection. Bluetooth enables file transmissions, Internet access, a private area network function, and access to a keyboard, mouse and printer between devices supporting the Bluetooth function without a cable connection. The Bluetooth function is only available between devices supporting Bluetooth

(computers, mobile phones, PDAs, printers, etc.), and the function may be restricted depending on the device profile. The Bluetooth function is optional and may not be supported depending on your Compatibility with a Bluetooth device not certified by a Bluetooth certification or logo model. is not guaranteed. Bluetooth Functions File Transmission Network Access Network Access through a Phone Connection Data Sync

(Synchronization) You can exchange files between 2 Bluetooth devices. You can exchange files with other computers, mobile phones, PDAs, etc. You can connect to another computer with the Bluetooth function as you access a wireless LAN in Ad-Hoc mode or connect to the Internet through an AP or Internet Connecting Sharing Server. You can connect to the Internet through a Bluetooth mobile phone. You can synchronize the PIMS data (Outlook E-mail address data) with mobile phones, PDAs, notebook computers, etc. supporting Bluetooth. 10

Electronic Business Card (Vcard) Sound Output HID Connections You can exchange electronic business cards with mobile phones, PDAs, notebook computers, etc. supporting Bluetooth. You can listen to audio from the computer through another Bluetooth device or listen to audio of another Bluetooth device through the computer. You can connect a keyboard, mouse, joystick, etc. supporting Bluetooth. For more information about using the Bluetooth function, see the online help of the Bluetooth Device. For more information about using the Bluetooth function, refer to the online help of the Bluetooth Device. 10

Bluetooth Software Setup Bluetooth software is installed on computers supporting Bluetooth. For first time use, set up the Bluetooth software as follows. 1 Double-click My Bluetooth Places on the desktop. icon 2 Click the Next button to start setting up. In the setting up steps, enter a device name to be displayed in the Bluetooth Manager program. Enter a name in the Computer Name field and select Laptop for the Computer Type field. Also, a step appears for selecting the services to be provided by your Bluetooth device for other Bluetooth devices. At this point, the program automatically detects available services and displays them as selected. It is recommended not to change the default selection. 10

If you change the service settings, the driver necessary for the additionally selected services are installed. At this point, a warning message may appear informing you that there is no Microsoft logo. Since it does not affect the operation, continue the installation. 3 If the driver installation is complete, the next step proceeds which searches for nearby Bluetooth devices. Since you do not have to search while setting up, click Skip and finish the settings. 4 If the settings are complete, the My Bluetooth Environment window appears. 10

Using Bluetooth Describes how to exchange files between computers supporting Bluetooth and how to use other Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth Help Bluetooth Help provides detailed procedures on using Bluetooth functions. Double-click My Bluetooth Settings on the Desktop and press the <F1> key

(Help). Exchanging Files between Bluetooth computers The procedures to exchange files and folders between Bluetooth computers are described below. 1 On the computer that is sending a file

(hereafter Computer A), right-click the Bluetooth icon in the notification area and select Quick Connection

> File Transmission > Search for Device. Select Start > Help and Support

> Networking and the Web >

Networking > Wireless networking

> Bluetooth devices (wireless) to view Windows Help. 107 2 In the Select Device window, click a computer to be connected (hereafter Computer B). 3 When the Bluetooth Security Setting window appears, enter the Bluetooth security code (or Bluetooth PIN) and click Start Pairing. The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code

(for example, same numbers) on both Bluetooth devices to make a connection. 4 After a short while, the Bluetooth PIN Code required dialog box appears on Computer B, enter the code that you have input in Step  above. 5 If the FTP File Access Privilege Request window appears on Computer B, click the window. If the Select Access Permission window appears, click OK. 108 6 The file transmission window appears on computer A. Drag files or folders to send onto the window, and the files or folders are automatically transmitted. 7 If the file transmission is complete, close the File Transmission window. The received files are saved in the C:\Documents and Settings\[user name]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange folder. 10

Connecting Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick and Headset devices The procedures to use Bluetooth HID devices (keyboard, mouse, joystick, etc.) or a headset, etc. on the computer are described below. The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code on both Bluetooth devices to make a connection. 1 Turn on the Bluetooth function on the device to connect to (mouse, keyboard, joystick or headset). Some devices have a button to turn on the Bluetooth function, so see the corresponding device manual. Settings icon on the Desktop. 2 Double-click the My Bluetooth 3 If the My Bluetooth Settings window appears, click View devices in range. If the device to connect to appears, click the device. (for example, mouse) Connecting to the Internet via a Bluetooth mobile phone If you have a Bluetooth mobile phone, you can connect your computer to the Internet without a wired or wireless connection to an Internet service provider. Check if your mobile phone supports Bluetooth. To connect to the Internet through the Bluetooth mobile phone, you need the wireless operator account information such as the username, password, dial number and so on. For this information, contact your mobile phone operator. If you connect to the Internet through a Bluetooth mobile phone, the connection tariff may be very expensive. Please use this function only after ascertaining the connection cost or subscribing to a data communications plan that allows you to connect to the Internet directly. If the device does not appear, click View devices in range. If the device has not appeared yet, since this menu changes to Search devices in range, click Search devices in range to show the device. 4 If the Bluetooth PIN Code input window appears, enter a PIN code referring to the manual of the corresponding device. The PIN code for an HID device is generally printed in the manual of the corresponding device. 5 If you enter the PIN code, you can immediately use the device. A Bluetooth keyboard and mouse work only in Windows. They will not work in MS-DOS mode or in Hibernation mode. 110 Environment icon 1 Double-click the My Bluetooth 2 When the My Bluetooth Environment window appears, click Add Bluetooth device. on the Desktop. 4 Select your mobile phone from the Select Device window and click Next. The following descriptions use a mobile phone called V70. 3 If the Bluetooth Setup Wizard screen appears, click Next to start the device search. 111 5 If the Bluetooth Security Setup window appears, enter a Bluetooth security code (Bluetooth PIN) and then click Start Pairing. The Bluetooth security code

(Bluetooth PIN) is a password used between two devices connected through Bluetooth. You can enter any number between  to 

alphanumeric characters on the two devices. 6 If the Pairing signal is delivered to the mobile phone, the Bluetooth security code input window appears in the mobile phone screen. Enter the same security code into the mobile phone that you entered in Step . For example, if you entered 1 on your computer, you must also enter 1

on the mobile phone. 7 In the Select Bluetooth Service window, select the File Transfer and Dialup Networking services and then click Finish. 11

Depending on the mobile phone model, the service names and supported service types may differ. If you select only one service, one more Setup Wizard step appears. If you select Dialup Networking Service only, a Bluetooth Connection window appears. Click cancel and close the window. 10 If the Connect to Bluetooth window appears after a while, enter the Username, Password, and Dial (Dial Number) fields and click the Dial button. Then, when the Internet connection is established, you can use the Internet using Internet Explorer. 8 The Dialup Networking and File Transfer service icons are added to the My Bluetooth Environment window. 9 Double-click V740 Dialup Networking in the My Bluetooth Environment window. If you click this button, enter the phone number in the Dial Number field and click OK to save the phone number. If you check this option, the currently entered username and password are saved. 11

Disconnecting the Internet connection z Double-click V740 Dialup Networking in the My Bluetooth Environment window. x Click the Disconnect button in the Bluetooth Connection Status window. Alternatively, press the Disconnect button on the mobile phone to disconnect the Internet connection. About the Username, Password, and Dial Number The username, password and dial number used here do not refer to the ones used by the mobile phone user. They refer to the unique username, password and phone number of the mobile phone operator that are required to make the connection. Ask your mobile phone operator about them. When an AP name is required to connect to the Internet An APN (AP Name) may be required depending on the mobile phone or mobile phone operator. In this case, click Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System

> Device Manager > Modem, double-click Bluetooth Modem, select the Advanced tab and then enter an APN in the format of +CGDCONT=1,IP,APN in the Miscellaneous Initialization Command field (e.g. when the APN is internet.com). For detailed information, ask your mobile phone operator about this. 11

It is recommended using only one Bluetooth device at a time as connecting multiple Bluetooth or other wireless devices at the same time may slow or destabilize the Bluetooth connection. Data communications via Bluetooth may be poor when the CPU load is at full capacity or there are insufficient system resources. The Bluetooth function of a Bluetooth PDA, mobile phone, mouse or keyboard may be turned off. To use them in connection with a Samsung computer supporting Bluetooth, you must check if the Bluetooth function of the device to connect to is turned on. For the procedures on turning on the Bluetooth function of a device, refer to the relevant device manual. The services provided by Bluetooth devices may vary depending on their capabilities. For the services provided by the Bluetooth device, refer to the device manual. Stopping a Bluetooth device Right-click the Bluetooth icon on the Taskbar and select Stop the Bluetooth device. To use a Bluetooth device after stopping it, select Start Bluetooth device like above. Usage Instructions Generally, Bluetooth devices deliver stable performance while connected within a m(10 ft.) distance. For Bluetooth to operate smoothly, use the computer in an open environment with no walls or obstacles in the way and having low radio interference. You can connect to only one Bluetooth device at a time for a phone connection, data syncing, electronic business card exchange, FAX transmission/reception, sound related functions, and serial port functions. 11

Chapter 5. Using Applications Introducing Programs CyberLink YouCam (Optional) Samsung Update Plus (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) Using Samsung Magic Doctor (Optional) Reinstalling Software (Optional) 117 121 123 125 130 131 Introducing Programs Using the software supplied with the Samsung computer, you can easily use functions and troubleshoot problems. Try to use the software after learning about the basic use of the software. For detailed information, refer to the help section of the corresponding software. The software programs provider may vary, depending on your computer model. In addition, some pictures may differ from actual product depending on the computer model and software version. 117 Multi Media Functions CyberLink YouCam

(Optional) Using this program, you can easily capture photos and videos with your web camera. CyberLink YouCam makes it more fun to have online video chats or to record videos with live effects. 11 Management Functions Samsung Update Plus Samsung Update Plus is a software

(Optional) function that examines and updates the Samsung software and drivers installed on your Samsung computer to the most recent versions. 1

(Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter This is a security solution that detects and removes computer viruses and protects the computer from Internet threats. 1

118 Easy Network Manager

(Optional) Easy Network Manager is a program that enables you to easily configure the network settings. You can configure the network settings for each location and you can also diagnose the network status. 

Samsung Battery Manager Samsung Battery Manager

(Optional) Samsung Battery Manager is a power Samsung Battery Manager is a power management program that provides easy-to-use power management and power saving settings so that the battery usage time can be extended. 1

Easy Display Manager (Optional) Easy Display Manager is a program that displays the changed setting on the screen when a setting is changed by pressing the shortcut keys, and enables changing the display mode through the Display Settings window. Example) The icon that appears when pressing the Fn +

keys to change the screen brightness. Easy SpeedUP Manager (Optional) This program enables you to select operation mode when you need maximum system performance or low-

noise/low power consumption with one-

click. 

For Windows XP model, Easy SpeedUp Manager function is provided in Magic Keyboard program. If you reinstall Windows XP, you have to install the Magic Keyboard program additionally using the System Software Media in order to use this function. Easy Resolution Manager

(Optional) This program allows you to set a resolution of 10x78 pixels on a computer that supports a resolution less than 10x78 pixels. You can view the whole picture when running a program or game that supports a resolution of 10x78 pixels. However, when the resolution is set to 10x78 pixels, the picture on the screen may be distorted. when the computer is MS Live Skydrive

(Optional) If you double-click the Microsoft Live icon connected to the Internet, you can visit the website that allows you to use free web storage provided by Microsoft. If you sign up and log onto the website, you can use the web storage for free. For more information, refer to the help center on the website. Battery Life Extender (Optional) The Battery Life Extender is a battery power management program that enables extending the battery life. 11 Phoenix Failsafe Phoenix FailSafe is a program

(Optional) developed by Phoenix Technologies LTD, that enables PC users to protect and track their PC via the FailSafe website when their PC is lost or stolen. For more information, please refer to the online help of the software or the FailSafe website. 11

Troubleshooting Functions SAMSUNG Magic Doctor

(Optional) SAMSUNG Magic Doctor is troubleshooting software provided by Samsung Computer for system diagnosis, and restoring the system. The system diagnosis function enables users to diagnose system problems without assistance from others. Samsung Recovery Solution

(Optional) Samsung Recovery Solution provides a Restore Function that enables you to easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state when a problem occurs with your computer, as well as a Backup Function that enables you to easily save your computers current status and your data. For models with an SSD (Solid State Disk), Samsung Recovery Solution is not provided. 10 CyberLink YouCam (Optional) CyberLink YouCam makes it more fun to have online video chats or to record videos with live effects. The program versions described in this manual are subject to change and the screen images and terms in this manual may differ from actual product. For more information on how to use the program, refer to the online help. Do not take pictures or record video of someone without their permission. Do not take pictures or record video in locations where photography is prohibited. Do not take pictures or record video in locations where you could violate another persons privacy. 1 Double click the CyberLink YouCam icon programs > Samsung > CyberLink YouCam > CyberLink YouCam. on the Desktop. Or click Start > All Function buttons Preview Window Emotion effects All captured content Avatars, Frames, Filters and Distortions 11 If you click the settings button you can configure the capture, display and document settings.

, 2 Click the Snapshot Capture button in front of the camera. A snapshot is taken or video starts recording. or To stop a video recording, click button. The the Stop recording is stopped. By applying several effects or avatars to your photos or videos while capturing, you can make your own contents fun and interesting. 3 You can view your captured photos and videos in the All captured content window. You can view a picture or watch a video by double-clicking it. 1

Samsung Update Plus (Optional) Samsung Update Plus is software that examines and updates the Samsung software and drivers installed on your Samsung computer to the optimal version. To check for updates and update your computer using Samsung Update Plus, your computer must be connected to the Internet. The update search result may differ depending on your computer model. Samsung Update Plus does not provide updates for applications installed after purchasing the computer. 2 If you click on Check for updates, new updates are searched for. To update the software and drivers 1 Select Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Update Plus

> Samsung Update Plus. If this is the first time you are running the program, a window will appear asking you if you agree to the agreement in the window. Click Agree to use this software. 1

3 If there are available software or driver updates for your computer, the available updates will be listed. Select the required updates from the list and click Install Update to start the update. (The update list on the screen may differ depending on the computer model.) Automatic update items display By default, your computer is configured to automatically check for updates. If there is a new update available, this is notified in the notification area. Click the balloon help icon in the notification area. Here you will be able to find the latest available updates. Updates that must be installed separately. If you select an update item that must be installed separately, a message appears informing you of this. Follow the instruction message to correctly install it. 1

McAfee SecurityCenter (Optional) McAfee SecurityCenter (a virus/spyware detection and protection software that includes a firewall function. Hereafter, referred to as McAfee) is software that protects your PC from various Internet threats as well as detecting and removing viruses. For more detailed information on the program, refer to the McAfee help. You can register McAfee when connected to the Internet. McAfee software is optional. It may not be supplied for some models or it may be supplied through the McAfee installation icon. When the installation icon is provided, you have to install the program referring to the Installing McAfee section. A different anti-virus program may be provided depending on the computer model. Installing McAfee For some models, an Install McAfee Web Essentials icon is located on the Desktop. In this case, you can install the McAfee software according to the following procedures and then use the McAfee software. For some models, a McAfee Security Center icon the software is already installed, the installation step is not required. is located on the Desktop, since z Double click the Install McAfee Web on the Desktop. Essentials icon x The Chain Installer window opens and the installation begins automatically. Please wait for a moment. 1

c When the installation is complete, the Chain Installer window disappears. Using McAfee To use McAfee, user registration is required. If a user is not registered, even though virus inspection is supported, your PC will not be completely protected because the virus information will not be updated with the latest information. The procedures to inspect and heal viruses after the user registration will be described below. User Registration 1 The Program Setup screen appears while booting. Click Next. If the Program Setup screen does not appear, right-click over the McAfee icon in the Taskbar and then select Product Setup from the pop-up menu. 3 The Create New McAfee Account item appears. Be sure to fill in all the fields and click Next. The Program Setup Completed window appears. If you have already registered with McAfee, click Login and enter the registered email address and password to login. The Program Setup Completed window appears. 2 The End User License Agreement appears. Check if the country has been correctly selected and then click Accept. 1

Inspecting and Healing Viruses The procedures to check if the computers files or information have been infected by a virus and to heal viruses found by McAfee are described below. 3 If a virus has been found, click View Results. The viruses are listed. Since the corresponding viruses have already been removed, you can use your computer without any concern. For possible virus infections

(where it is not completely certain), the Detected message appears. In this case, the items will be maintained or deleted depending on your decision. To deal with new viruses, please always keep McAfeeSecurityCenter up to date. In general, it is automatically updated when connected to the Internet. Alternatively, you can update it manually by clicking Update to the Internet. after connecting

> McAfeeSecurityCenter. 1 Click Start > All Programs > McAfee 2 Click the Scan button on the left side of the program. The Scan begins. At this time, if a virus is found, it is immediately healed during the inspection. 17 Configuring the McAfee Firewall The McAfee Firewall is configured for the product when purchasing the product in order to protect the computer from viruses. However, if the firewall is activated, you may not connect to the network or the Internet properly. In this case, you have to change the settings as follows. Method 1) When you need to select Allow Access in the Server or Internet Access Request window. When you connect to a bank, stock market, or gaming website, an access request window appears. In this case, select Allow Access in the window and click OK. Then you can install the program normally or open the page. 18 Method 2) When you need to deactivate the Firewall If you cannot connect to the Internet when using a broadband Internet service, you can connect to the Internal normally if you disable the McAfee Firewall. However, since it may cause a security problem, be careful when doing so. z Double-click the McAfee Security Center icon from the Desktop. x Click the Advanced menu at the bottom left and click Configure >

Internet&Network. c Turn the Internet&Network at the right to Off, set the Select when to re-enable firewall to Never and then click OK. v Click Home in the left menu pane and click Ignore next to the Firewall protection is disabled message. It is recommended activating the Windows Firewall for your computer's safety when you have disabled the McAfee Firewall. To activate the Windows Firewall, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall > Change Settings >

On(recommended). 1

Using Samsung Magic Doctor (Optional) Magic Doctor is troubleshooting software provided by Samsung Computer. A user can diagnose system problems via one-click or by selecting diagnostic items. The screens used in this manual may differ from actual screens according to the program version. 3 When the system status diagnostics are complete, the diagnostics result appears. Diagnosing the System 1 Select Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Magic Doctor

> Samsung Magic Doctor. 2 Click the Diagnose the System icon. If a problem has been found, click on Cure for Samsung Magic Doctor to cure the problem. The system status diagnostics start. 10 Reinstalling Software (Optional) If you have reinstalled the Windows operating system, or the system and program do not operate properly, you can re-install the driver and program using the System Software Media. When software is not working properly, it is recommended removing the software using the Add or Remove Programs of the Control Panel and reinstalling the software using the System Software Media. The System Software Media is supplied as a CD or DVD depending on your computer model. To use the System Software Media, the external USB ODD must be connected to the computer. The following descriptions are supposing that the external USB ODD is connected. Some model is not supplied System Software Media depending on your computer model. Running the System Software Media Insert the System Software Media into the CD-ROM drive. The initial screen appears automatically. Standard Installation Minimum Installation Custom Installation 11 This displays a list of drivers or programs that are not currently installed on your computer from the system software Media provided.All necessary components are installed using the factory defaults. This displays the components (driver, Windows programs,etc) that, if not installed, may cause problems with the system performance.You can install only required components. You can customize the installation of drivers and programs. Installing drivers and programs 1 Select Standard Installation in the System Software Media main screen. 2 The system is scanned to display the drivers and programs that need to be installed. 3 Click OK. The drivers and programs are automatically installed as factory defaults. 4 When done, restart the system. 1

Chapter 6. Settings and Upgrade LCD Brightness Control BIOS Setup Setting a Boot Password Changing the Boot Priority Upgrading Memory Battery Using the Security Lock Port 134 136 140 143 144 146 154 LCD Brightness Control You can adjust the LCD brightness in 8 levels.

(for example, in Customized mode) In this mode, you can change the brightness and device setting details. Adjusting LCD Brightness Using Keyboard Press the Fn+

the brightness of LCD. The LCD brightness has eight levels of degree. By pressing the Fn+

brighter by one level of degree.

, the LCD gets or Fn+

to adjust Adjusting LCD Brightness Using Samsung Battery Manager Appropriate LCD brightness is set for each mode in Samsung Battery Manager. In user settings mode, you can select the brightness level. Click Start > All Programs > Samsung

> Samsung Battery Manager >

Samsung Battery Manager. 1

LCD Brightness The LCD brightness settings for maximum battery mode, general mode, and maximum performance mode in Samsung Battery Manager are not maintained when your computer reboots. Only the LCD brightness setting in the user settings mode is maintained once you reboot the computer. For information on the other features of Samsung Battery Manager, see the description on batteries. 1

To Maintain the Changed LCD Brightness After Reboot Configure the following settings to maintain the LCD brightness set using the screen adjustment key or Samsung Battery Manager. z Turn on the computer. If the SAMSUNG logo appears, press the F2 key. Then, setup will start. x Change the value of Brightness Mode Control on the Boot menu to User Control. c Press the F10 key to save the change and complete setup. How to Reduce Battery Consumption Adjust the screen brightness to a darker value or select the maximum battery mode in Samsung Battery Manager to reduce battery consumption. Bad pixels of an LCD The LCD may have less than  bad pixels but it does not affect the computer performance. This product may have bad pixels of the same level as the products made by other companies. Caution for Cleaning up LCD Wipe the LCD from the center to the outside with a soft cloth soaked in a computer-

dedicated detergent. If you wipe the LCD firmly, it may have damage. 1

BIOS Setup The BIOS Setup enables you to configure your computer hardware according to your needs. Use the BIOS setup to define a boot password, change the booting priority, or add a new device. Since incorrect settings may cause your system to malfunction or crash, take care when configuring the BIOS. The functions of the BIOS setup are subject to change for product function enhancement purposes. The BIOS Setup menus and items may differ depending on your computer model. Entering the BIOS Setup 1 Turn the computer on. 2 When the booting screen (SAMSUNG logo) appears, press the F2 key to enter the BIOS Setup. Press the F12 key while the booting screen(SAMSUNG logo) appears, the system will try to boot from the network. 1

3 After a moment, the BIOS setup screen appears. The items in the BIOS setup may differ depending on the product. Setup Menu Help Help for the selected item appears automatically. Setup Items 17 The BIOS Setup Screen Menu Main Used to change the basic system and environment settings. Description Advanced Used to configure advanced functions on your computer for devices and chipsets. Used to configure security functions, including passwords. Used to set the boot priority and other boot options Used to exit the Setup either saving the changes or not. Security Boot Exit 18 System Setup Keys In the Setup, you have to use the keyboard. F1 Up & Down Keys F5/F6 F9 ESC Left & Right Keys Enter F10 Press to view the Setup Help. Press to move up and down. Press to change the item value. Press to load the default Setup settings. Press to return to a higher level menu or to move to the Exit menu. Press to move to another menu. Press to select an item or to enter a sub menu. Press to save the changes and exit Setup. The keyboard image and color may differ from the actual keyboard. 1

Setting a Boot Password When setting a password, you have to enter a password to use the computer or enter the BIOS Setup. By configuring a password, you can restrict system access to authorized users only and protect data and files saved on the computer. Do not lose or forget your password. If you have forgotten your password, contact a Samsung service center. In this case, a service fee will be charged. Setting a Supervisor Password A Supervisor Password is required to turn the computer on or to start the System Setup. When setting a Supervisor Password, users other than a supervisor cannot use the computer. Setup. 1 Select the Security menu in the BIOS 2 In the Set Supervisor Password item, press <Enter>. 10 3 Enter a password, press <Enter>, re-

enter the password for confirmation, and press <Enter> again. The password can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters. Special characters are not allowed. 4 When a message confirming the password configuration appears in the Setup Notice window, press

<Enter>. The supervisor password has been set. The supervisor password is required to turn the computer on or to enter the BIOS Setup. Setting a User Password The User Password restricts access to the computer or for configuring the BIOS Setup, like a Supervisor Password. However, the Setup items that can be configured with a User Password are restricted, unlike for a Supervisor Password. Before configuring a user password, a supervisor password must have been configured. Deactivating the supervisor password also deactivates the user password. In the Set User Password item, press

<Enter> and complete the procedures from Step  of Setting a Supervisor Password. Setting Up a Boot Password To setup a boot password, the administrator password (Set Supervisor Password) should be set in advance. Set the Password on boot item to Enabled. Once a boot password is set, you have to enter a password to boot up the computer. 11 Setting up a Hard Disk Drive Password (Optional) A supervisor password must be set using the Set Supervisor Password menu. If you set a password for a hard disk drive, it cannot be accessed from another computer. Press <Enter> in the Set HDD Password item and define a password as described in Step  of the Setting up the Supervisor Password. Deactivating the Password 1 Press <Enter> on the password to be deactivated. For example, to deactivate a supervisor password in the Set Supervisor Password item, press <Enter>. 2 In the Enter Current Password item, enter the currently configured password and press <Enter>. field empty, and press <Enter>. 3 Leave the Enter New Password item 4 Leave the Confirm New Password 5 In the Setup Notice window, press field empty, and press <Enter>.

<Enter>. The password is deactivated. The hard disk drive password setting function is not provided for some models. Changing the hard disk drive password For security purposes, you can only change a hard disk drive password after restarting the computer by pressing the computer Power button. If you cannot change the hard disk drive password or the HDD Password Frozen message appears when entering the BIOS Setup and then selecting Security > HDD Password, press the Power button to turn the computer on again. 1

Changing the Boot Priority This computer is configured to boot from an external-type ODD first. This chapter describes how to change the boot priority so that the computer boots from the hard disk drive first. 1 Select the Boot menu in the BIOS Setup. 3 Press the down key () to move to the IDE HDD item and press the F6 key to move up to the top item. 2 Press <Enter> on the Boot Device Priority item. 4 Press the F10 key to save the settings and exit Setup. The highest boot priority device is now set to the Hard Drive. 1

Upgrading Memory A memory is installed in the memory slot at the bottom of this computer. The procedures to replace the memory are described below. Replace new memory only after shutting the computer down completely. Do not replace memory when the computer is in Sleep mode. Disconnect main power plug and remove the battery before continuing. Only use the same type of memory as specified in the Product Specification. Replacing the Memory 1 Remove the screw on the memory compartment cover at the bottom of the computer using a screw driver. 2 Pull the memory module latches outward. The memory module will pop up. Remove the memory module out at an angle of 0 degrees. Fixing Screw 1

3 Insert a new memory module into the memory slot at an angle of approximately 0 degrees aligning it to the angle of the memory slot. 4 Push the memory module down so that it is completely fixed. If the memory does not fit easily, push the memory module down while pulling the memory module latches outward. Memory Slot 5 Close the memory compartment cover and fasten the screw. 1

Battery Please refer to the following instructions when running the computer on battery power without connecting the AC power. A Lithium-Ion smart battery is supplied with this computer. Carefully read and follow the precautions printed on the battery before using the battery. Precautions Use only chargers specified in the User Manual. Never heat the battery pack, put it near or in a fire or use at a temperature higher than 60C, as this may cause fire. Never cause a short circuit between the battery pack terminals or disassemble the battery pack. Carefully read and follow the precautions printed on the battery and the safety instructions in the User Manual before using the battery. Please refer to the system operation environment ( 10) of this manual and operate and store the battery at room temperature. Installing/Removing the Battery 1 Shutdown the system, close the LCD panel and place the computer upside down on a flat surface. 1

Charging the Battery 1 Attach the battery and connect the AC adapter to the DC-in jack of the computer. The battery will then start charging. 2 When charging is complete, the Charge LED turns green. Status Charging Charging complete AC adapter not connected Charge LED Amber Green Off 2 Slide the center battery latch into position and then the UNLOCK remove the battery. z x 3 To install the battery again, slide the battery into the system. 17 Measuring the Remaining Battery Charge You can view the battery charge status by completing the following procedures. Battery Usage Time Information A battery is an expendable supply, so when using it over a long time, the capacity/battery life is shortened. If the battery life is reduced to under half of its initial time, we recommend purchasing a new battery. For long periods of not using the battery, keep the battery discharged. This extends the battery life time. keys on the keyboard. To use the shortcut key to view Press the Fn +

The remaining battery charge (%) will displayed for a moment. You can only view the charge status in this way when Easy Display Manager is installed on your computer. Battery Warning You will hear an alarm when the remaining battery charge reaches below 10%. In this case, connect the AC adapter or turn off the computer and install a fully charged battery. If the battery residual amount is

~%, the computer automatically shuts down after saving the data. The battery residual amount may vary depending on the computer model. 18 Extending the Battery Usage Time Decreasing the LCD Brightness Press the Fn +

keys on the keyboard to decrease the LCD brightness to extend the battery usage time. Using Samsung Battery Manager Battery Manager is a management program that allows you to use the battery efficiently. You can select the optimized power mode depending on the system environment. Click Start > All Programs > Samsung

> Samsung Battery Manager >

Samsung Battery Manager. 1

Select Power Mode Power-saving Effect Maximum Battery Mode This mode is appropriate for the environment that requires maximum battery lifetime. The system performance may be degraded in this mode. General Mode This mode is appropriate for the regular environment and it optimizes the performance of the system and battery. Maximum Performance Mode This mode is appropriate for the environment that requires maximum system performance. The battery life may get shorter in this mode. User Settings Mode This mode allows you to configure the detailed settings. You can set LCD brightness, power status, and color quality. What is the Power-saving Effect?

This product displays the battery life in each power mode. The higher the power saving effect increases, the longer the graph bar is displayed. When Using Games or Multimedia The system may not operate properly in maximum battery mode. It is recommended to connect the AC adapter to the system or to use the system in general mode. 10 Usage Mode of Samsung Battery Manager The maximum battery mode optimizes the system operation speed to increase the battery run time, so the program execution time may get longer. If you change the power settings, the properties in Power Options window will also be changed. Complete, install Samsung Battery Manager using the System Software Media in order to use the general mode. Disabling Unused Devices If you turn off unused devices, battery lifetime will improve. 1 Click Device Manager from Start

> Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Systems >

Hardware tab. 2 Right-click the devices that you are not using and select Disable.

 

 

Extending the Battery Life (Optional) The Battery Life Extender is a battery power management program that enables extending the battery life. Users can change the settings depending on their requirements. The Battery Life Extender is optional and may not be supplied depending on the model. Extender. 1 Click Start > All Programs > Samsung > Battery Life Extender > Battery Life 2 When the following screen appears, select a mode and click the OK button. You can use the battery in the selected mode. Battery Normal Mode Battery Life Extension Mode Battery Life Extension Mode 151 Battery Normal Mode Battery Life Extension Mode This mode maintains 100% of the battery charge when using the computer on AC power. In this case, although the battery use time increases, the battery life is reduced. This mode maintains 80% of the battery charge when using the computer on AC power. In this case, although the battery use time decreases, the battery life is extended. Press the F2 key when the Samsung logo appears in the booting sequence to enter the BIOS Setup, select Advanced > Battery Life Cycle Extension, and set it to Enable. Then you can use the battery life cycle extension mode. 152 3 Move to the Boot > Smart Battery Calibration item using the direction keys and press <Enter>. Using the Battery Calibration Function When charging/discharging the battery repeatedly for a short time only, the battery usage time may be reduced by the difference between the actual battery charge and the remaining charge display. In this case, the actual battery charge and the remaining charge display will be the same by discharging the battery completely using the Battery Calibration function, and then recharging it again. after turning off the computer. 1 Disconnect the AC power adapter 2 Restart your computer and press the F2 button when the Samsung logo appears, to start the BIOS Setup. 4 Highlight Yes in the Battery Calibration Conrmation window and press <Enter>. The Battery Calibration function is activated and the battery is forcefully discharged. To stop the operation, press the <Esc> button. This operation requires 3~5 hours depending on the battery capacity and the remaining battery charge. 153 Using the Security Lock Port You can connect a Kensington lock to the Security Lock port to prevent your computer from being stolen when you have to use the computer in a public place. To use this feature, you have to purchase the Kensington lock additionally. To use the Kensington lock, refer to the product manual. Tie the Kensington lock cable to a xed object and install the other end of the cable to the Security Lock port. 154 Chapter 7. Appendix Reinstalling Windows XP (Optional) Using Samsung Recovery Solution

(Optional) Questions and Answers Windows Related Display Related Sound Related Wired LAN Related Wireless LAN Related Games and Programs Related Bluetooth Security Center Product Specications Glossary Index 156 161 170 170 171 173 176 177 183 185 186 190 202 206 Reinstalling Windows XP (Optional) You can reinstall Windows using the System Recovery CD when Windows does not work properly.

 A System Recovery CD may not be supplied depending on your computer model.

 To reinstall Windows when Windows does not boot, refer to page

 To reinstall Windows using System Recovery Media, an external-type ODD must be connected before turning the computer on. The following descriptions assume that an external ODD is connected. 159. Reinstalling Windows may delete data (les and programs) saved on the hard disk drive. Make sure to backup all important data. Samsung Electronics shall not be held liable for any loss of data. Reinstalling Windows Explain installation option as a standard. the CD-ROM drive. 1 Insert the system recovery CD into 2 In the initial screen, click Standard Installation.

 Standard installation You can change the settings for partitioning, the installation folder, etc. during the Windows installation. However, reinstalling Windows may delete the data on the hard disk drive such as les, programs, etc. In order to minimize damage from data loss, please remember to always back up data.

 Quick Installation This re-installs Windows with the user data and the system conguration intact. The user data in the already existing Windows folders may be preserved as the existing Windows folders are overwritten. 156 3 The description for the standard installation appears. Click Yes. The installation starts, and the system will be restarted after a while. When Quick Installation is selected, Setup proceeds with Step 3 before automatically installing Windows. Quick Installation overwrites the existing Windows version, so that drivers or applications do not need to be reinstalled. 4 After the system has restarted, the message Press any key to boot from CD appears. Do not press any key at this time. After a while the partition conguration screen appears. To not change the partition, press Enter. What is partition conguration?

Partition conguration is a function that divides the hard disk drive into one or several partitions. Note that changing the partition deletes all of the data on the hard disk drive. 5 Select the folder to install the Windows operating system. To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press L on the keyboard. If you press ESC to select another folder for the installation, new Windows folders are created causing a risk of dual booting. 6 After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows installation, restart the system, and the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed. You do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation. Options window appears, click Next. 7 When the Regional and Language 8 When a window that requires your name and organization pops up, enter your name and the organization and click Next. 9 When the Date and Time Settings window appears, click Next. Setup will continue. 157 10 When the system restarts to display Press any key to boot from CD, do not press any key. When you see the Windows desktop, this means that the installation process is completed. Remove the system recovery CD and install the device drivers and applications from the system software Media. 158 Reinstalling when Windows does not start When Windows does not start, boot up with the System Recovery CD and from there you can reinstall Windows. 1 Insert the system recovery CD into the CD-ROM drive and start the computer. 2 If the following message appears on the screen, press any key from the keyboard. Press any key to boot from CD..... 3 Do not press any key at this time. After a while the partition conguration screen appears. To not change the partition, press Enter. 4 Select the desired le system (format). To maintain the current le system, press Enter. 5 Select the folder to install the Windows operating system. To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press L on the keyboard. 6 After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows installation, restart the system, and the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed. You do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation. 7 Follow the instructions of the Windows XP installation wizard to continue with the installation. 159 8 When the installation is complete, the computer will restart. When the system has restarted, the Press any key to boot from CD.. message appears. Ignore the message. The system boots and the Windows and Windows Registration screen appears. Register Windows, following the instructions to nish the Windows installation. Remove the System Recovery CD and install the device drivers and application programs using Standard Installation from the System Software Media. 160 Using Samsung Recovery Solution (Optional) Samsung Recovery Solution provides a Restore Function that enables you to easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state when a problem occurs with your computer, as well as a Backup Function that enables you to easily save your computers current status and your data.

 Samsung Recovery Solution may not be provided or the version may differ depending on your computer model and the usage procedures may differ depending on the version. The screen images in this document may differ from actual product.

 For models with an SSD (Solid State Disk), Samsung Recovery Solution is not provided.

 To use the backup and restore function to DVD, an external ODD must be connected. The following descriptions assume that an external ODD is connected. Samsung Recovery Solution Functions

 Restore Function Using this function, you can easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state without using the System Recovery Media or the Windows Installation CD, when your computer is no longer working properly or fails to boot up due to a problem. If you have backed up data, you can restore the backup data. 161 Basic Restore This function quickly restores major Windows les (C:\

Windows) without touching the user conguration and data on the C drive. Restore Functions Complete Restore This function deletes the entire C drive and then restores the contents of the C drive completely.

 Initial Status Restore This function restores the computer to the initial status saved when the computer was run for the rst time after it was purchased.

 Complete Backup Restore This function restores the computer to the point where the user performed a Complete Backup. Data Restore This function restores the user data if the user previously backed up data.

 Backup Function You can backup the entire C drive or all your data to another hard disk drive or DVD. You can restore the backed up drive or data using the Restore function. Backup Functions Initial Status Backup This function backs up the initial status of the computer. Data Backup This function backs up specic folders or les. Complete Backup This function backs up the entire drive C. 162 Using Samsung Recovery Solution Not only can you use Samsung Recovery Solution when Windows is running, but also when you are unable to boot up into Windows. Lets learn how to use Samsung Recovery Solution. Initial Status Backup If you turn your computer on for the rst time, the Initial Status Backup function is performed after registering Windows. This function saves an image of the Initial Status of the C drive to a secure location so that users can restore the computer to the Initial Status using the Complete Restore function. An Initial Status Backup is only performed once immediately after the computer is purchased. 1 If you turn the power on for the rst time, the Register Windows screen appears. If you register Windows according to the instructions on the screen, the computer will be restarted. 2 When the computer has been restarted, the User Registration Complete message appears. Click OK. The computer will restart. 3 The Initial Status Backup screen appears. To resize the C and D drives, click Advanced and partition the disk accordingly. Adjust the partition size using the slide bar and then click Next. The partition disk function is only available when the computer is turned on for the rst time and will not be available afterwards. Once you have completed the partitions, you cannot resize the partitions. Therefore partition the disk carefully. 4 The Initial Status Backup is performed to backup the initial status of the C drive to a secure location. This backup image is used for the Complete Restore function that restores your computer to the initial status when the computer is not working properly. 5 When the Initial Status Backup is complete, restart Windows. 163 Quick Restore Quick Restore enables you to easily restore your computer to a previous, normal state when a problem occurs with your computer. Quick Restore provides Basic Restore and Complete Restore

(Computer Initial Status Restore) options. 1 When Windows is running:

Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When Windows does not start:

Turn the computer on and press the F4 key when the boot screen

(SAMSUNG logo) appears. After a moment, the computer boots up in Restoration mode and the Samsung Recovery Solution screen appears. The touch screen function is not supported in this mode even if your model supports a touch screen. In this mode, please use the touchpad or mouse instead of the touch screen. 164 2 If the Samsung Recovery Solution program is launched for the rst time after purchasing the computer, the license agreement screen appears before the restoration is started. Read the agreement and click Agree to continue. 3 If the initial menu screen appears, click Restore. If you click Select by Symptom, the Select by Symptom menu appears. If you select a symptom, a recommended restoration option will blink. Click the restoration option to continue. 4 Select either Basic Restore or Complete Restore from the Restore menu.

 A Basic Restore restores the major Windows les only while maintaining the user conguration and data on the C drive in a short time.

 A Complete Restore deletes the entire C drive and then restores the contents of the C drive. 6 When the Restart the System message appears after the restoration is complete, click OK to restart the system. Make sure that the power cord is connected while the restoration is in progress. The rst time the computer boots up after a Complete Restore has been performed, the speed of the boot process may be slowed down due to the system optimization process. At this time, do not shut the computer down by force. User Complete Backup/Restore A Complete Backup saves the complete image of the C drive onto another drive or DVD. A Complete Restore restores the image le saved by the Complete Backup onto the C drive. This guide describes the Complete Backup and Complete Restore procedures on the basis of backing up and restoring by using DVD. Run Complete Restore if the computer does not work even after Basic Restore has been completed. 4-1 If you have selected Basic Restore:

In the Basic Restore screen, click the Next button. The system will be restarted. 4-2 If you have selected Complete Restore:

In the restoration point selection screen, select the restoration point described as Computer Initial Status and click the Next button. The system will be restarted. Since a Complete Restore deletes all user data as well as additionally installed programs, please backup your important data rst using the Data Backup function, before running Complete Restore. 5 The computer boots up into restoration mode and the restoration progress message appears. If you click OK, the restoration begins. The restoration may take some time, please wait for a moment. 165

 Complete Backup

 If you run Complete Backup using a DVD, you can restore the computer even when a problem occurs with the hard disk or when the restoration area is removed.

 To perform a complete backup onto DVD, an external ODD that supports DVD burning must be connected. 1 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the F4 key in the boot screen to enter restoration mode. appears, click Backup. 2 When the initial menu screen 3 Click Complete Backup in the backup menu. 4 Enter a description for the backup regarding the current computer status in the Description eld so that you can easily recognize it later, and specify the Save Path. If your computer has a DVD-Writer, you can specify the DVD drive as the Save Path. Select Drive D. Select the DVD drive. 5 If you click the Next button, the system restarts in restoration mode and the Complete Backup begins. If you have selected the DVD drive as the Save Path, the Enter a blank DVD message appears. Insert a blank DVD and click the OK button. Samsung Recovery Solution supports DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+RW, and DVD-RW, but does not support CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-DL

(Dual Layer), HD-DVD, and Blu-Ray. 166 6 The Complete Backup begins. If multiple DVDs are required, the expected number of DVDs is displayed in the progress screen. Whenever burning a DVD is completed, the Insert the next DVD message will appear. Continue the backup according to the instructions. 7 When the Restart the System message appears after the backup is complete, click OK to restart the system.

 Complete Restore 1 When backing up onto DVD Turn the computer on and insert the backup DVD into the DVD drive. If there are multiple backup DVDs, insert the rst DVD. When backing up to another drive Proceed to Step 2. 2 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. 167 When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the F4 key in the boot screen to enter restoration mode. 3 When the initial menu screen appears, click Restore and then click Complete Restore. 4 Select a Complete Backup restoration point in the restoration point selection screen and click the Next button. The system is restarted. 5 The restoration progress message appears after the computer boots up in restoration mode. If you click OK, the restoration begins. If multiple DVDs have been used for a Complete Backup, whenever burning a DVD is completed, the Insert the next DVD message will appear. 6 When the Restart the System message appears after the restoration is complete, click OK to restart the system. The Complete Restore has been completed. 4 Enter a description for the backup in the Description eld so that you can easily recognize it later and specify the Save Path. If your computer has a DVD-Writer, you can specify the DVD drive as the Save Path. If you have specied a hard disk drive or a removable disk as the Save Path, the SamsungRecovery\

SamsungData folder is created on the corresponding drive (e.g. D:\) and the data is saved to the folder. Take care to not delete the folder by mistake or on purpose. 5 If you click the Next button, the Data Backup begins. If you have selected the DVD drive as the Save Path, the Enter a blank DVD message appears. Insert a blank DVD and click the OK button. 6 The Backup is completed message appears. User Data Backup/Restore Data Backup enables you to save specic les or folders onto another drive or DVD. Data Restore enables you to restore data using the data saved by a Data Backup when data is lost. This guide describes the Backup and Restore procedures on the basis of backing up and restoring by using DVD.

 Data Backup 1 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the F4 key in the boot screen to enter restoration mode. 2 When the initial menu screen appears, click Backup and then click Data Backup. 3 In the data selection screen, select either Basic Selection or Select from all, select a folder or le to be backed up, and then click the Next button. 168 4 Select a backup item to be restored in the backup list and click the Next button. 5 Select a folder for the restoration and click the Next button. Data Restore begins. 6 When Data Restore is completed, check if the data has been restored to the specied folder.

 Data Restore 1 When backing up onto DVD When backing up to another Turn the computer on and insert the backup DVD into the DVD drive. drive Proceed to Step 2. 2 Click Start > All Programs >

Samsung > Samsung Recovery Solution > Samsung Recovery Solution. When you cannot start Windows, turn the computer on and press the F4 key in the boot screen to enter restoration mode. 3 When the initial menu screen appears, click Restore and then click Data Restore. 169 Questions and Answers This section provides information on possible problems, solutions and other references for system use.

The system freezes during program operation. A1 There is an error with the program currently being used. Press the

<Ctrl>, <Alt>, and <Delete> keys simultaneously and click End Task in the Windows Task Manager window. A2 There is an error with the Windows OS. Reboot the system by using the Power button. Windows Related

The system does not shutdown properly. A When the system does not shutdown normally, press and hold the Power button until the system manually shuts off. If the Power-Saving Mode is congured into the Power button, press and hold for more than 4 seconds to shut the system off. When the system is turned on after such manual shutdown, Scandisk will run to check errors in the system. 170 Display Related

The LCD screen is too dark or too bright. A Turn on the LCD backlight or adjust the screen brightness. Press Fn +

to turn on the LCD backlight or press Fn +

screen brightness.

, Fn +

to adjust the

The screen saver disturbs screen viewing during Media Player or video le operation. A Click Tools > Options > Player and then clear the Allow screen saver during playback in the Media Center check box.

When I connect an external display and change the settings to display the screen image on both the LCD and the external display by pressing the Fn +

key combination, the screen is not displayed properly. A Press Fn +

key combination again. If the screen is still not displayed or only part of the screen is displayed by doing this, that means the LCD resolution is too low or too wide and the external display support the resolution. Right-click over the Desktop, select Properties, select the Settings tab and change the resolution to 800 x 600.

The Taskbar on the bottom of the screen does not appear when a projector is used as the display device. A This may happen, if the projector does not support LCD resolution. In this case change the resolution to 800 x 600 (recommended) on your computer. 171

The color is strange when the picture is displayed on the connected monitor (or projector). A Check the monitor signal cable connection and reconnect the cable.

Switching the MS-DOS command prompt to full screen mode or Windows mode by pressing the

<Alt>+<Enter> keys does not operate properly. A Pressing the <Alt>+<Enter> keys using an USB keyboard, may cause the key input to be recognized as multiple key inputs depending on the keyboard input recognition time. In this case, the MS-DOS command prompt is repeatedly switched to full screen and then to Windows several times. Please press the

<Alt>+<Enter> keys more quickly, or press the <Alt>+<Enter> keys using the system keyboard.

The shortcut icons are not displayed on the screen even if I press the shortcut key. A The shortcut icons only appear when the Easy Display Manager program is installed. 172

Remove Realtek High Denition Audio Driver and restart the computer.

 Reinstalling the Sound Driver If there is an already installed sound driver, uninstall the driver according to the procedures above. The sound driver is included on the System Software Media.

Insert the System Software CD-

ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Select Sound Driver on either Standard Installation or Custom Installation, then the 2 components of the sound driver are automatically installed. Sound Related

How to install and uninstall the sound driver. A To install or uninstall the sound driver from this system, please follow the procedures below.

 Sound Driver Components The sound driver consists of the following 2 components and the 2 components are automatically installed during the installation. Realtek High Denition Audio Driver: Realtek High Denition Audio WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver:

SRS

 Uninstalling the Sound Driver To remove the sound driver due to a problem or for an update, follow the procedures below. If you do not follow the sequence below, the sound driver may not be removed or the reinstalled driver, or may not work properly.

Select Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

Remove WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver rst.

173

How can I congure the Recording Mixer while I am video or audio chatting?

How can I congure the Recording Mixer while broadcasting music in WinAMP?

A1 Playback Mixer Settings

Double-click the Volume icon in the Taskbar and select Options >

Properties from the menu.

Select Realtek HD Audio Input in the Mixer device eld, conrm that the Microphone is selected in the Show the following volume controls eld, and click the OK button.

Select the Microphone item in the Record Control window and close the window. A1 Playback Mixer Settings

Double-click the Volume icon in the Taskbar and select Options >

Properties from the menu.

Select Realtek HD Audio Input in the Mixer device eld, select Stereo Mix in the Show the following volume controls eld, and click the OK button.

Select the Stereo Mix item in the Record Control window and close the window. A2 Realtek HD Sound Effect Manager A2 Realtek HD Sound Effect Manager Settings

Click Start > Control Panel >

Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Realtek HD Sound Effect Manager.

Click Microphone tab.

Select Noise Suppression and Acoustic Echo Cancellation and Click OK. Using Acoustic Echo Cancellation option keeps the Microphone Volume muted in the Playback Mixer. Settings

Click Start > Control Panel >

Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Realtek HD Sound Effect Manager.

Click Microphone tab.

Unselect Noise Suppression and Acoustic Echo Cancellation and Click OK. 174

I cannot hear my voice through the built-in microphone. A This is because the setting is congured so that sound from the built-in microphone to the speaker is muted to reduce the howling sound effect. You can use the microphone recording function normally, even in this state. When using an external microphone, if you disable the microphone channel mute function of the play mixer, you can hear the sound input into the external microphone through the speaker.

I have a trouble with recording after selecting Acoustic Echo Cancellation and unselecting Mute in the Microphone volume of the Playback Mixer. A This is because the sound from the external microphone is muted by the Acoustic Echo Cancellation Algorithm considering the sound as a Acoustic Echo while the recording and playing back is processed at the same time. In this case, select Mute in the Microphone Volume of the Playback Mixer after selecting Acoustic Echo Cancellation item. 175

- If the system wake up from Sleep mode even though there is no received signal, use the system after disabling the <Wake On LAN>

function.

- The LAN LED may not be turned off if System is shutdown without disabling the WOL <Wake on LAN> option.

- Connecting a wired LAN while using a wireless LAN may not activate the

<Wake On LAN> function. Set the Wireless LAN to Disable to use the

<Wake On LAN> function.

- When the computer exits standby/

hibernate mode a message informing 10Mbps wired LAN connection may appear. It is because restoring the network takes about 3 seconds. When the network is restored, it operates in 100Mbps. Wired LAN Related

<Wake On LAN> function A <Wake On LAN> is a function that activates the system from Sleep mode when a signal (such as a ping or magic packet command) arrives over the network (wired LAN).

 S3 WOL (Wake On LAN)

Select Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance

> System > Hardware > Device Manager > Network Adapters.

Double-click the Marvell Yukon 88E8040 PCI-E Fast Ethernet Controller item. The above driver name may be different.

From Power management tab, select Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby, then click OK. Restart the system. 176

 To use the wireless LAN settings using Windows:

A Click Start > Control Panel

> Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections > Wireless LAN Connection, right-click and check if the Windows manages wireless network settings (W) option is selected in the Wireless Network tab of the Properties window. If not, select the option.

Click Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance >

Administrative Tools > Computer Management and click Services and Applications > Services. In the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Conguration and check if the Startup Type is Automatic and the Status is Started. Wireless LAN Related

I cannot nd an AP.

 Check the Wireless LAN LED. A Check if the Wireless LAN LED is on. If off, press the Wireless LAN On/Off button <Fn>+<F9> to turn it on.

 Reinstall the driver. A Reinstall the driver using the software media.

 Check the Wireless Zero A Conguration (WZC) service. If the Windows cannot make this wireless connection message appears while searching for wireless networks, it indicates that a program other than Windows is set to manage the wireless LAN settings. 177

 Check the authentication type. A A connection may be disconnected after a period of time if the Use IEEE 802.1x network authentication option is selected when IEEE 802.1x authentication is not being used. View the properties of the corresponding AP in the Wireless Network Properties. In the Authentication tab, unselect the Use IEEE 802.1x authentication in this network option. For detailed information on the authentication server, ask your network administrator.

 Check the AP settings. A1 Check if the surroundings are appropriate for a wireless LAN. A wireless LAN connection may be limited by the surrounding environment and distance. Obstacles such as walls and door mats affect the quality of the wireless LAN signal. You have to install an AP in a high, open position far away from any other radio signal sources.

I cannot connect to an AP.

(The wireless connection is disconnected frequently.)

 Check the Network Key. A Right-click the Wireless Network Connections icon from the Taskbar and click View available wireless networks. If wireless networks are found, it indicates that the device is operating properly but the network settings may have a problem. Please check the Network Key (Encryption Key) and the AP settings.

 Check if there is a device nearby using the same frequency band. A1 If there is a device nearby using the same frequency band such as another wireless LAN device, wireless video transceiver, microwave oven, plasma bulb, etc., channel interference may occur. If you experience interference from another device, it is recommended changing the AP channel. A2 When operating in EEE802.11g mode, if there is a IEEE802.11b device operating nearby, you may experience low data rates or even disconnection as it operates in Hybrid mode. 178 If the AP is excessively far away, or is installed at the end of a building and you are attempting to use the wireless LAN from the other end, you may not be able to use the wireless communication normally because the signal is blocked by obstacles between you and the AP (such as a wall). A2 Check if the AP operates properly. If the AP is not operating properly, turn it off and on again and try again. A3 Check if the AP rmware is the latest version. (For more information on the AP rmware, ask the AP manufacturer or your product provider.) A4 Check if the AP is properly connected to the network. Connect the LAN cable from the AP to a computer and check if the network is connected properly. A5 Check the Network Key (Encryption Key) settings again. If the automatic password converting function

(passphrase function) is enabled and the wireless connection is normal but you cannot send data over the connection, please enter the Network Key (Encryption Key) manually. 179 A6 Check the AP settings as follows. If there are multiple APs running at the same time, check the channel setting of each AP. If the interval between the channels of the APs is narrow, you may experience electromagnetic interference. Set the channel numbers of the APs so that the internals between the channels are maximized. (for example, Ch1, Ch5, Ch9, Ch13) computer. It is recommended unselecting the Hide option of the AP. SSID (Service Set ID) is a name used to distinguish a wireless LAN from other wireless LANs. It is recommended using Long Preamble. Preamble is a signal for data transmission synchronization. Although some APs support Short Preamble, there might be a compatibility problem. Because Fixed channel selection is more stable then Auto channel selection, Fixed channel selection is recommended. It is recommended not using the Block Any and Any Connection Block functions. Although these functions block connections at the client side when the network name is Any or Blank, it may cause a compatibility problem. follows; (for example, 169.254.xxx. xxx). If your network does not support DHCP, you have to manually congure an IP address by asking your network administrator. In addition, even if your network supports DHCP, the Internet connection may not be available if the DHCP server fails to allocate an IP address to your computer.

I have congured both wired and wireless connections with the same IP address, but the network connections do not work properly. A You cannot use the same IP address for wired and wireless connections. To use only one IP address for both wired and wireless connections, you must disable one of them according to your requirements in Network Connections in the Control Panel. For more information on the AP settings, see the owners manual supplied with the AP.

Although a connection has been established, I cannot connect to the Internet.

 Check the TCP/IP settings. A If you cannot connect to the Internet but you are connected to an AP, check if the TCP/IP settings are congured properly. When you are not connected to an in the Taskbar. If you AP, an X mark appears over the Wireless Network Connections icon double-click the icon, the Search for Wireless Connections window appears. Reconnect to a wireless network referring to the descriptions of Connecting to a Wireless LAN in the Using the Network section. When you are connected to an AP, an X mark appears over the Wireless Network Connections icon Taskbar. Double-click the icon and check if the IP address is properly allocated on the Support tab. If the IP address is not properly allocated, the IP address will be displayed as in the 180

After installing the Wireless LAN Setting program, the AEGIS Protocol (IEEE 802.1x) protocol appears in the [Local Area Connect Properties] window. A The protocol is a security authentication protocol that is automatically installed when the Wireless LAN Settings program is installed and does not affect the program operation.

(For Intel PROSet) After installing PROSet, I cannot manage my wireless network in Windows. A When clicking Use Microsoft Client in the Tools menu of the PROSet, you can manage wireless network in Windows. Thereafter, if you wish to manage your wireless network, click Activate Intel PROSet/Wireless in the Tools menu of the PROSet.

(For Intel PROSet) Although I have turned the wireless LAN off using the Turn Off Wireless LAN button in PROSet, the Wireless LAN LED is still on. A This is normal. The Turn Off Wireless LAN button in PROSet just turns off the wireless LAN software. The wireless LAN hardware is not affected by this operation. 181

Internet Connection or File Sharing doesnt work, when I use Internet Connection Sharing or Ad Hoc. A You have to register the IP address allocated for Internet Connection Sharing or Ad Hoc as a Trusted IP in McAfee SecurityCenter. Click McAfee SecurityCenter >

Advanced menu > Congure >

Internet and Network > Advanced

> Trusted and Banned IPs, and register the IP address or IP address range as a Trusted IP address. The IP address range for DHCP is 10.0.0.1 ~

10.255.255.254 if not specied.

Computer-to-computer(ADHOC) wireless Network connection is established but not detected on the other wireless network. A To enable peer-to-peer network search under Windows XP SP3 environment, you have to select additional options in the wireless proles as follows:

Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon on the taskbar, and select View Available Wireless Networks.

Click Change the order of preferred networks on the left window.

At the Preferred networks, select the peer-to-peer network prole and click Properties.

Check Connect even if this network is not broadcasting item.

On the Connection tab, check Connect when this network is in range and click OK. 182

While playing a game, pressing the Fn +

screen is not properly displayed. keys does not work or the A Some games and 3D application programs may change the display device control. Therefore, pressing the Fn +

keys may terminate the running program or may display an abnormal screen. Press the Fn +

launching a program and do not press them while running the program. keys before

Running speed of a game is too slow or fast. A Change the setting of Power Schemes to Always On.

(Click Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance >

Power Options > Power Schemes tab, then congure the Power schemes eld to Always On.) Games and Programs Related

3D game is not executed, or some functions are not working. A Change the graphic setting of the game to 2D or Software Renderer, then execute the program again.

I launched a game right after installing it, and the game is not executed. A This problem may occur when the game is not compatible with Windows XP. Launch the game again, and it will be executed properly.

Fn +

work. Key combination does not A While displaying video of VCD or MPEG, or the display setting is Dual View, you cannot toggle display devices. Also the installation of NetWare Client 32 program disables the function of Fn +

. 183

Some part of a game image is not displayed or is displayed in black.

Game play is not displayed smoothly on the screen. A For 3D games, the texture data for the 3D screen display is saved to the system memory. If there is insufcient system memory, the data is saved to the hard disk drive and loaded to memory when required. This operation may temporarily stop displaying the picture on the screen. In this case, lower the game resolution or the screen settings. In addition, some 3D games, such as Dungeon and Fighter, RollerCoaster Tycoon 3, Special Forces, Universe at War, Transformer the Game etc, take up lots of hardware resources so upgrading system memory to 2G is recommneded. A This may happen when running a game designed for DirecX 8.1 or which has 1024 x 768 as the default resolution, such as NHL 2003, MVP Baseball 2003, Special Forces, Hangame, Pmang etc.

The picture is not displayed properly for some games. A Some games may not display the picture properly when the screen resolution is set to 1024 600 and the color quality is set to 32 bit. For these games, set the screen resolution to 1024 x 600 or 800 x 600, and the color quality to 16bit. 184 Bluetooth

I cannot nd or connect the headset. A1 If the headset is connected to another device and is currently being used, you will not be able to locate it. In this case, even if you locate the headset, you will not be able to connect it. Disconnect the headset from the device and then try again. A2 If the headset is connected to the power adapter, the Bluetooth wireless connection is not available. Disconnect the headset from the power adapter and try again. A3 A Bluetooth headset generally provides On/Off and Pairing modes. To connect the headset to another Bluetooth device such as a computer or cellphone, it must be in Pairing mode. Switch the headset to Pairing mode and try again. In general, a Bluetooth headset in Pairing mode is automatically switched to On/ Off mode after a pre-

determined period of time. 185

I have connected the headset, but I cannot hear sound normally. A1 If the Bluetooth headset is properly connected to a computer, the Control Pane Sound Playback Device changes to Bluetooth Audio (for a mono headset) or High Quality Bluetooth Audio (for a stereo headset). If the Sound Playback Device in the Control Panel is not changed properly, you may not hear any sound. Check the audio settings in the Control Panel according to the procedures below.

 Conguring Sounds and Audio Devices in the Control Panel

Double-Click Start > Control Panel >

Sounds and Audio Devices.

Select the Audio tab in the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window.

Check if the Sound playback and Sound recording device is set to Bluetooth audio (for a mono headset) or High Quality Bluetooth audio (for a stereo headset). A2 Check if the headset is properly connected and is operating normally. A3 Check the volume settings of the headset and the computer. A4 If a multimedia application such as Windows Media Player is running when connecting the headset, the headset may not be connected or recognized properly. Connect the headset rst and then launch a multimedia application. Security Center

To change the popup window display settings when connected to the Internet. In the Windows XP SP3 environment, you can decide whether to display a popup window when connected to the Internet, for user convenience and security. A1 To display most of the popup windows when connected to the Internet:

Click Internet Options in Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

In the Privacy tab of Internet Properties, clear Block pop-ups. A2 To display popup windows only from the current site when connected to the Internet:

Place the cursor on the notication area at the bottom of the Internet address bar and right-click to display a menu, from which you can select Temporarily Allow Pop-ups or Always Allow Pop-ups from This Site. 186 A3 To display popup windows from a particular site:

Click Internet Options in Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

In the Privacy tab of Internet Properties, click Settings from Block pop-ups.

Enter a URL to want to allow pop-ups into Address of Web site to allow and click Add.

You will nd that the entered address is added to the allowed sites list. The next time you connect to the Web site, you will see pop-ups appearing. When you need to re-block a permitted site, select the Web site address that you want to block from the Allowed Sites and click Remove.

When you connect to a Web site, you see the message, To help protect your security, Internet Explorer stopped this site from installing an ActiveX control on your computer or This site might require the following ActiveX control below the address bar. A Windows XP SP3 blocks unsigned ActiveX controls from being installed when connected to certain Web sites for security reasons. On some Web sites that have no ActiveX controls installed, applications are not started or do not display properly. In this case, to install ActiveX controls, right-click the notication area to display a menu from which you can select Install ActiveX control. 187

When you see a Windows Security appear on the right Alert icon part of the Taskbar. With the Security Center feature added, Windows XP SP3 checks the Firewall, the automatic updates conguration and installation of virus-checking programs to display a Windows Security Alert icon on the right part of the Taskbar when it judges that the computer is vulnerable to attacks from the Internet. In this case, check the following to install the necessary components. A1 Set up the Windows Firewall. When you set up the Windows Firewall, you will be protected from unauthorized access through the Internet or the network.

Click Windows Firewall in Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

From the General tab of Windows Firewall, select ON (recommended).

If you want to allow a certain program or service to gain access to your computer using the Firewall, select and check the program or service that you want to allow access from, in the Exceptions tab of the Windows Firewall. If you want to add a program to Programs and Services, click Add Program and select it. A2 Set up Windows Automatic Updates. This automatically downloads and installs critical updates via the Internet to keep your computer up to date.

Click Automatic Updates in Start >

Control Panel > Security Center >

Manage security settings for.

From general tab of Automatic Updates window, select Automatic

(recommended). A3 Keep your computer current with the latest virus updates. (ex: Norton Antivirus) Even when you have installed Norton AntiVirus on your computer, Windows cannot recognize the program until you congure the settings, displaying a Security Alert icon. 188 A list of anti-virus programs that Windows can detect:

- Symantec Norton Anti-Virus

- NetworkAssociates (McAfee)

- TrendMicro

- ComputerAssociates

- Panda

- Kaspersky

- Ahnlabs (AhnLab) Visit the Microsoft Web site

(www.microsoft.com) regularly to check the latest list. When you rst use or install Norton AntiVirus for the rst time, follow the Registration Wizard steps to congure the registration settings. To protect your computer from virus attacks with the latest updates, click Options to display the Norton AntiVirus Options window. From the left menu of the window, check Run Automatic Protection to select Automatic Protection and check Run LiveUpdate to select LiveUpdate. A4 Two virus scanning programs on one computer may cause system conicts. Remove one of the programs from the system. A5 If Windows does not recognize the existence of an anti-virus program even when it has been installed, your computer could be vulnerable to attacks from the Internet. You should install an anti-virus program that your computer is able to identify. Check the following programs which Windows can detect and select one from the list. 189 Product Specications The system specications may differ depending on the derived models. For detailed system specications, refer to the product catalog. CPU Intel ATOM Processor Main Memory Memory type: DDR2 SODIMM Main Chipset Intel 945GSE + ICH7M Hard Disk Drive (Optional) 9.5mmH SATA HDD or 9.5mmH SATA SSD Optical Disk Drive (Optional) External ODD: USB 2.0/9.5mm Super-multi Graphics Sound Chipset Network (Optional) Multi Card Slot Ports (Optional) Dimensions LCD Battery (Optional) Operating Environment Operating Voltage Frequency Output Power Output Voltage Intel 945GSE (Internal) ALC272-GR Wired LAN: Marvell 88E8040 Wireless LAN: 802.11 b/g,802.11 b/g/n (Optional) Bluetooth 2.0+EDR (Optional) SD Card / SDHC Card / MMC USB 2.0 Port x 3, Video (Monitor) Port, Headphone Jack, Microphone Jack, Wired LAN Port, Power IN Jack, Kensington Lock 262 x 184.5 x 28.0 mm 10.1 WSVGA (1024 x 600) Lithium-Ion Smart Battery: 4Cell/6Cell Temperature : -5~40C for storage, 10~32C when operating Humidity : 5~90% for storage, 20~80% when operating 100 - 240VAC 50/60Hz 40W 19VDC 2.1A(40W)

 The weight and dimension listed are approximate values and may vary a bit from the actual product.

 Optional components may not be provided or different components may be provided depending on the computer model.

 The system specications are subject to change without notice.

 The hard disk drive capacity of a computer in which Samsung Recovery Solution is installed, is represented as smaller than the product specication. 190 Wireless LAN Specications (802.11a/b/g, 802.11n Card) Intel 802.11ABG WLAN

 The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical Specications Power Specications Network Specications Item Detailed Specications Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Compatibility Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgement (ACK) Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* This device supports the Wireless LAN Security Specications WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) for Wi-Fi. To connect to a WPA wireless network, you have to congure the settings according to the network connection environment. For detailed setting information, ask your network administrator. 191

 Radio Specications RF Band 2.4GHz, 5GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11a mode : OFDM 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11a mode** : MAX 54Mbps 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode*** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11a mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11a device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11a)

*** 11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g) 192 Intel 802.11AGN WLAN

 The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical Specications Power Specications Network Specications Item Detailed Specications Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V Compatibility IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgement (ACK) Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* This device supports the Wireless LAN Security Specications WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) for Wi-Fi. To connect to a WPA wireless network, you have to congure the settings according to the network connection environment. For detailed setting information, ask your network administrator. 193

 Radio Specications RF Band 2.4GHz, 5GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11a mode : OFDM 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11n mode : MIMO 11a mode** : MAX 54Mbps 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode*** : MAX 54Mbps 11n mode**** : MAX 450Mbps, MAX 300Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11a mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11a device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11a)

*** 11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g)

**** 11n mode is only supported when it is connected to an IEEE802.11n device (e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE802.11n). 194 Wireless LAN Specications (802.11BG Card) Intel 802.11BG WLAN

 The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical Specications Power Specications Network Specications Item Detailed Specications Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Same as System Operations Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity: Less than 85%

Power 3.3V Compatibility IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgement (ACK) Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* This device supports the Wireless LAN Security Specications WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) for Wi-Fi. To connect to a WPA wireless network, you have to congure the settings according to the network connection environment. For detailed setting information, ask your network administrator. 195

 Radio Specications RF Band 2.4GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11g mode is only supported when the device is connected to an IEEE 802.11g device.

(e.g. Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g) 196 Realtek 802.11BGN WLAN

 Device Name for Formal Registration : Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Type Detailed Specications Physical Specications Power Specications Network Specications Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity 30 x 26.65 mm (Width X Height) Temperature: Bet. 0C and 70C, Humidity:

Less than 85%

Power 3.3V Compatibility Operating System Media Access Protocol

(MAC) Security IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n Microsoft Windows XP/Vista CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgement (ACK) Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

* This device supports the Wi-Fi wireless LAN security specications, WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access). To connect to a network constructed with a WPA, the appropriate settings for the network are required. For detailed settings, ask your network administrator. 197

 Radio Specications RF Band 2.4GHz Supported Channels The channels allowed for the country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11n mode: MIMO 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode** : MAX 54Mbps 11g mode*** : Max. 300 Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the actual data rate.

** 11g mode is only supported when this device is connected with an IEEE802.11g device (E.g. An Access Point that supports IEEE802.11g).

*** 11n mode is only supported when this device is connected with an IEEE802.11n device (E.g. An Access Point that supports IEEE802.11n). 198 Atheros 802.11BG WLAN

 The Name of the Registered Equipment : Special Low Power Wireless Device for Wireless Data Communication Systems. Physical Specications Power Specications Network Specications Item Dimensions Operating Temperature And Humidity Detailed Specications 30.0 50.95mm (Width X Height) Temperature: Between 0C and 70C, Maximum Humidity: 85%

Power 3.3V IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g Compatibility Operating System Microsoft Windows XP/Vista Media Access Protocol (MAC) CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgement (ACK) Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit/128bit WPA*

Security

* This device supports the Wireless LAN Security Specications WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) for Wi-Fi. To connect to a WPA wireless network, you have to congure the settings according to the network connection environment. For detailed setting information, ask your network administrator. 199

 Radio Specications RF Band 2.4GHz Supported Channels Channels allowed per country. Device Transceiver Standard Output Power MAX 10mW Modulation Scheme Data Rate (Mbps)*

Antenna Type 11b mode : DSSS 11g mode : OFDM 11b mode : MAX 11Mbps 11g mode** : MAX 54Mbps Built-in Antenna

* The data rate may differ from the real data transmission rate.

** 11g mode is supported only when you are connected to an IEEE 802.11g device (e.g. An Access Point supporting IEEE 802.11g). 200 ENERGY STAR Partner As an ENERGY STAR Partner, SAMSUNG has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efciency. Registered Trademarks Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Co., Ltd. SENS is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Intel, ATOM/ Pentium/Celeron are registered trademarks of the Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. All other product or company names mentioned herein are registered trademarks of their respective companies. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS TruSurround XT processes multichannel audio content to create a truly immersive surround sound experience with rich bass and clear dialog from the laptop speakers or headphones. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS WOW XT signicantly improves the playback quality of audio, delivering a dynamic 3D entertainment experience with deep bass from even the smallest and most closely spaced speakers. 201 Glossary The Glossary lists the terminologies used in this User Guide. For terminologies other than these, look in Windows Help. Backup A way to save the current data to restore it later if necessary. A backup is a way to restore computer data when the data or computer is damaged. Device Manager An administrative tool used to manage computer devices. You can add or remove hardware or update a device driver using the Device Manager. Client This refers to a computer that uses a shared network resource provided by a server. DDR SDRAM (Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) DRAM is a memory type whose cells consist of a capacitor and transistor manufactured at a low price. SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by synchronizing the clock with the external CPU clock. DDR SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by doubling the operating speed of the SDRAM and is widely used nowadays. This computer uses DDR SDRAM. Direct X An application interface developed to enable Windows application programs to access hardware devices at a very high speed. Since the operating speed of graphics, memory and sound cards must be very fast to provide high quality video and sound for games, Direct X enables faster control and interaction between applications and hardware devices. By using Direct X, the multimedia performance of Windows has been hugely improved. Driver Software that interacts between the hardware and the operating system. An operating system knows the hardware information and controls the hardware. In general, a driver is supplied with the corresponding hardware device. 202 LAN (Local Area Network) A communications network connecting computers, printers and other devices within a local area such as within a building. A LAN enables all connected devices to interact with other devices on the network. The current LAN uses the Ethernet media access control method developed in the early 1980s. To connect to an Ethernet, a network card called a LAN card, Ethernet card or network interface card is required. To exchange data between computers, a protocol is required besides the hardware equipment. Windows XP uses TCP/IP as the default protocol. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) There are Passive Matrix and Active Matrix LCD types. This computer uses the Active Matrix type LCD called a TFT LCD. Since an LCD is implemented by transistors instead of a cathode-ray tube unlike a CRT, its size can be slim. And because it does not blink, it reduces eye strain. DVD (Digital Versatile Disk) DVD was developed to replace CD

(compact disk). Although the shape and size of the disc are the same as that of a CD, the capacity of a DVD is at least 4.7GB while the capacity of a CD is 600MB. DVD video is digital unlike VHS

(analog) video and supports MPEG2 compression and digital audio. To play a DVD, a DVD drive is required. Firewall A security system used to protect an internal network or intranet from external networks through an authentication procedure. Hibernation Mode A power mode that saves all data in memory to the hard disk and turns the CPU and hard disk off. When canceling Hibernation Mode, all application programs that were running are restored to their last state. Icon This refers to a small image that represents a le that users can use. 203 Network A group of computers and devices, such as printers and scanners, connected by a communications link. A network can be either small or large and can be connected permanently through cables or temporarily through telephone lines or wireless links. The biggest network is the Internet, a worldwide network. Quick Launch This refers to a toolbar that can be congured so that you can launch a program such as Internet Explorer or display the Windows Desktop with one click. You can add any icon to the quick launch area of the Taskbar and launch frequently used program by clicking that icon. Notication Area This refers to the right area of the Taskbar including program icons such as the volume control, the power options and the time. Power Schemes This refers to a pre-determined power management option group. For example, you can set the time the computer waits before entering Standby Mode, or before the monitor or hard drive turns off. The settings are saved as a power scheme. Server In general, a server refers to a computer that provides shared resources for network users. Share This refers to setting a resource of a computer such as a folder or printer so that other users can also use it. Shared Folder A folder that can be used by other users on the network. 204 SSD (Solid State Disk) This refers to a device that saves information to semiconductors unlike a normal hard disk drive (HDD). There are two types of SSD. One saves data to the DRAM and the other saves data to the Flash Memory. Since there are no mechanical parts, an SSD provides a much better performance than an HDD. Especially, a Flash Memory-Type SSD provides high reliability and durability. Network Administrator A user who plans, congures and manages network operations. Sometimes, a network administrator is called a system administrator. Sleep Mode A power mode that enables computers to save power consumption when they are not being used. When a computer is in Sleep Mode, the data on the computer memory is not saved to the hard disk. If the power is turned off, the data in memory will be lost. System File System Files refer to les that are read and used by the Windows operating system. In general, system les must not be deleted or moved. USB (Universal Serial Bus) This refers to a serial interface standard developed to replace the conventional interface standards such as Serial and PS/2. While USB 1.1 supports 12Mbps

(12 million bits per second), USB 2.0 supports a data rate that is 40 times

(480Mpbs) faster than that of USB 1.1. The data rate of USB 2.0 is equivalent to that of IEEE1394. Therefore USB 2.0 is used for A/V devices supported by IEEE 1394 and a 2nd HDD and CDRW that require a high data rate. Windows Media Player A multimedia program included with Windows. Using this program, you can play a media le, create an audio CD, listen to a radio broadcast, search and manage media les, and copy les to a portable device, etc. 205 Index B Battery Battery Calibration BIOS Setup Bluetooth Booting Priority C CD Drive / Recording Charge Click Connect / Output Monitor Control Panel D Desktop / Change Dual View E Easy Network Manager H Help L LCD Brightness M Memory Multi Card Slot N Network P Password Product Specications Program R Recorder Remaining Battery Charge Resolution / Color S Safety Precautions Samsung Battery Manager Samsung Update Plus Security Lock Port Shortcut Keys Status Indicators T Touchpad U User Accounts / Switch User V Volume Control W Windows XP Wired Network Wireless Network 146 153 136 103 143 65 147 62 70 84 80 72 99 79 134 144 67 99 140 190 117 76 148 88 8 149 123 154 58 51 61 86 74 78 90 93 206 PE3XX_N

 

 

Atheros 802.11b/g Adapter Model AR5BXB63 802.11b/g Adapter July 2006 20002006 by Atheros Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. ATHEROS, the Atheros logo, 5-UP, Driving the Wireless Future, Atheros Driven, Atheros Turbo Mode, and the Air is Cleaner at 5-GHz are trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. Nonetheless, this document is subject to change without notice, and Atheros Communications, Inc. (Atheros) assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the contained information, or to notify a person or organization of any updates. Atheros reserves the right to make changes, at any time, in order to improve reliability, function or design and to attempt to supply the best product possible. Atheros does not represent that products described herein are free from patent infringement or from any other third party right. No part of this document may be reproduced, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. Atheros or its affiliates may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, maskwork rights or other intellectual property rights that apply to the ideas, material and information expressed herein. No license to such rights is provided except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. ATHEROS MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATHEROS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL SPECULATORY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, ATHEROS SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA TRANSMITTED OR OTHERWISE USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DATA. ATHEROS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS THEY MIGHT OTHERWISE APPLY TO THIS DOCUMENT AND TO THE IDEAS, MATERIAL AND INFORMATION EXPRESSED HEREIN. Document Conventions Text Conventions bold Bold type within paragraph text indicates commands, file names, directory names, paths, output, or returned values. Example: The DK_Client package will not function unless you use the wdreg_install batch file. italic Within commands, italics indicate a variable that the user must specify. Example: mem_alloc size_in_bytes Titles of manuals or other published documents are also set in italics. Courier The Courier font indicates output or display. Example:

Menu Error:Unable to allocate memory for transfer!

The Menu character tag is used for menu items. Example: Choose Edit > Copy.

[ ]

{ }

|

>

Within commands, items enclosed in square brackets are optional parameters or values that the user can choose to specify or omit. Within commands, items enclosed in braces are options from which the user must choose. Within commands, the vertical bar separates options. An ellipsis indicates a repetition of the preceding parameter. The right angle bracket separates successive menu selections. Example: Start > Programs > DK > wdreg_install. Notices NOTE: This message denotes neutral or positive information that calls out important points to the text. A note provides information that may apply only in special cases. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 iii Revision History Revision July 2006 Description of Changes Initial Release iv Feb 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Contents Introduction ...............................................................................................................7 System Requirements ........................................................................................7 Profile Management .................................................................................................7 Create or Modify a Configuration Profile.......................................................7 Remove a Configuration Profile.......................................................................8 Auto Profile Selection Management.......................................................................8 Switching to a Different Configuration Profile.....................................................9 Import and Export Profiles ......................................................................................9 Importing a Profile....................................................................................................9 Exporting a Profile ....................................................................................................9 TCP/IP Configuration..............................................................................................9 Configuring the TCP/IP Address for the network device:.................................9 General Tab..............................................................................................................10 Advanced Tab..........................................................................................................10 Security Tab .............................................................................................................11 Using EAP-TLS Security .................................................................................12 Using EAP-TTLS Security...............................................................................12 Using PEAP (EAP-GTC) Security ..................................................................13 Using PEAP-MSCHAP V2 Security...............................................................14 Using LEAP Security .......................................................................................15 Configuring LEAP ..................................................................................................15 Pre-Shared Encryption Keys..................................................................................16 Defining pre-shared encryption keys:..................................................................16 Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key ............................................................16 Disabling Static WEP..............................................................................................16 Using WPA Passphrase Security ..........................................................................17 Zero Configuration .................................................................................................17 Wireless Network Configuration..........................................................................17 Check the Status Information or Diagnostics......................................................18 Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 v Current Status................................................................................................... 18 Adapter Information Button ................................................................................. 19 Diagnostics Tab....................................................................................................... 19 Transmitted Frames................................................................................................ 20 Received Frames ..................................................................................................... 20 Scan Available Networks....................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a different network ....................................................................... 20 Display Settings....................................................................................................... 22 ACU Tools................................................................................................................ 22 Tray Icon .................................................................................................................. 23 Color ......................................................................................................................... 24 Quality...................................................................................................................... 24 RSSI* ......................................................................................................................... 24 Ad Hoc Mode .......................................................................................................... 24 Ad Hoc Mode Profile Configuration............................................................. 24 Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode...................................................................... 25 Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode Profile Configuration ........................ 25 Uninstall an Old Driver ......................................................................................... 26 Additional Security Features................................................................................. 26 Message Integrity Check (MIC) ............................................................................ 26 Advanced Status Information ............................................................................... 27 Compliance.............................................................................................................. 28 Industry Canada Notice:.......................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Avis de Conformit la Rglementation dIndustrie Canada: ..................Error!

Bookmark not defined. European Community CE Notice:................................................................... 28 vi Feb 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Introduction The Atheros 802.11b/g Adapter supports 802.11bg operation. The card uses the Atheros Client Utility (ACU) which is a user-mode utility designed to edit and add profiles for selected Atheros network interface adapters. System Requirements Laptop/ PC containing:

32-bit PCI Express Bus 32 MB memory or greater 300 MHz processor or higher Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack 6) Profile Management Configure the wireless network adapter (wireless card) from the Profile Management tab of the Atheros Client Utility. Add a profile Edit a profile Import a Profile Export a Profile Order profiles Switch to a different profile Remove a profile Connect to a Different Network The wireless network adapter works in either infrastructure mode (which uses an access point) or ad hoc mode (a group of stations participating in the wireless LAN). Create or Modify a Configuration Profile To add a new configuration profile, click New on the Profile Management tab. To modify a configuration profile, select the configuration from the Profile list and click the Modify button. The Profile Management dialog box displays the General tab. In profile management:

Edit the General tab. Edit the Security tab. Edit the Advanced tab. To configure a profile for ad hoc or access point (infrastructure) mode, edit the Network Type field on the Advanced tab. Note that the ACU only allows the creation of 16 configuration profiles. After the creation of 16 profiles, clicking the New button displays an error message. Remove an old profile or modify an existing profile for a new use. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 7 Remove a Configuration Profile 1. Go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Select the profile to remove from the list of configuration profiles. 3. Click the Remove button. Auto Profile Selection Management Including a profile in the auto selection feature allows the wireless adapter to automatically select that profile from the list of profiles and use it to connect to the network. Including a profile in auto profile selection:

1. On the Profile Management tab, click the Order Profiles button. 2. The Auto Profile Selection Management window appears, with a list of all created 3. Highlight the profiles to add to auto profile selection, then click Add. The profiles profiles in the Available Profiles box. appear in the Auto Selected Profiles box. Ordering the auto selected profiles:

1. Highlight a profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box. 2. Click Move Up, Move Down, or Remove as appropriate. The first profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box has highest priority, and the last profile has lowest priority. 3. Click OK. 4. Check the Auto Select Profiles box. 5. Save the modified configuration file. When auto profile selection is enabled by checking Auto Select Profiles on the Profile Management tab, the adapter scans for an available network. The profile with the highest priority and the same SSID as one of the found networks is the one that is used to connect to the network. If the connection fails, the adapter tries the next highest priority profile that matches the SSID, and so on. With auto profile selection enabled, the wireless adapter scans for available networks. The highest priority profile with the same SSID as a found network is used to connect to the network. On a failed connection, the adapter tries with the next highest priority profile. 8 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Switching to a Different Configuration Profile 1. To switch to a different profile, go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Click on the profile name in the Profile List. 3. Click the Activate button. The Profile List provides icons that specify the operational state for that profile. The list also provides icons that specify the signal strength for that profile. Import and Export Profiles Importing a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, click the Import button. The Import Profile window appears. 2. Browse to the directory where the profile is located. 3. Highlight the profile name. 4. Click Open. The imported profile appears in the profiles list. Exporting a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, highlight the profile to export. 2. Click the Export button. The Export Profile window appears. 3. Browse to the directory to export the profile to. 4. Click Save. The profile is exported to the specified location. TCP/IP Configuration Configuring the TCP/IP Address for the network device:

1. After configuring the wireless network adapter properties, open the Control Panel and 2. Find the Local Area Connection associated with the wireless network adapter. Right-

open Network and Dial-up Connections. click that connection, and click Properties. 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. 4. Click the radio button Use the following IP address, then enter an IP address and Subnet mask. Assigning an IP address and Subnet mask allows stations to operate in access point mode (infrastructure mode) or in ad hoc mode and to have Internet access. Default gateway and DNS server information is also required. IP configuration information

(DHCP to assign the IP address, gateway and DNS server IP addresses) is usually obtained from the corporate IT staff. 5. Click OK to finish. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 9 General Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the General tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Edit the fields in the General tab to configure the configuration profile. Make sure to also edit the Security and Advanced tabs. Profile Name Identifies the configuration profile. This name must be unique. Profile names are not case sensitive. Client Name Identifies the client machine. Network Names (SSIDs) The IEEE 802.11 wireless network name. This field has a maximum limit of 32 characters. Configure up to three SSIDs (SSID1, SSID2, and SSID3). Advanced Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Advanced tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab, then clicking the Advanced tab in Profile Management. Edit the fields in the Advanced tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. Transmit Power Level Power Save Mode Selects the transmit power level in mW. Actual transmit power may be limited by hardware. Specify:

Maximum mode causes the access point to buffer incoming messages for the wireless adapter. The adapter periodically polls the access point to see if any messages are waiting. Normal uses maximum when retrieving a large number of packets, then switches back to power save mode after retrieving the packets. Off turns power saving off, thus powering up the wireless adapter continuously for a short message response time. Network Type Specifies the network as either infrastructure or ad hoc. 802.11b Preamble Authentication Mode Specifies the preamble setting in 802.11b. The default setting is Short &

Long (access point mode), which allows both short and long headers in the 802.11b frames. The adapter can only use short radio headers if the access point supports and uses them. Set to Long Only to override allowing short frames. Select the mode the wireless adapter uses to authenticate to an AP:

Auto causes the adapter to attempt authentication using shared, but switches it to open authentication if shared fails. Open enables an adapter to attempt authentication regardless of its WEP settings. It will only associate with the access point if the WEP keys on both the adapter and the access point match. Shared only allows the adapter to associate with access points that have the same WEP key. 10 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. For infrastructure (access point) networks, click the Preferred APs button to specify up to four access points to which the adapter should attempt to associate. Security Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Click the Security tab in the Profile Management window. Edit the fields in the Security tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. To define the security mode, select the radio button of the desired security mode. Make sure to also edit the General and Advanced tabs. WPA/WPA2 Enables the use of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA). Choosing WPA/WPA2 opens the WPA/WPA2 EAP drop-down menu. The options include:

EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP Enables WPA/WPA2 Passphrase security. Click on the Configure button and fill in the WPA/WPA2 Passphrase. 802.1x Enables 802.1x security. This option requires IT administration. WPA/WPA2 Passphrase Choosing 802.1x opens the 802.1x EAP type drop-down menu. The options include:

EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to allow association. Note: If the Lock checkbox is checked, you cannot change any values in this profile. See your system administrator. Enables the use of pre-shared keys that are defined on both the access point and the station. To define pre-shared encryption keys, choose the Pre-Shared Key radio button and click the Configure button to fill in the Define Pre-

Shared Keys window. If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Pre-Shared Key

(Static WEP) Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 11 Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to allow association. None No security (not recommended). Using EAP-TLS Security To use EAP-TLS security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TLS security:

To use EAP-TLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TLS is supported, choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate authority from the list. The server/domain name and the login name are filled in automatically from the certificate information. Click OK. 3. Click OK. 4. Activate the profile. Using EAP-TTLS Security To use EAP security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA/WPA2 radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TTLS security:

To use EAP-TTLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TTLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TTLS is supported, choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list and click OK. 3. Specify a user name for EAP authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the EAP user name. OR: Enter an EAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and password and start the EAP authentication process. 4. Click Advanced and:

12 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. Using PEAP (EAP-GTC) Security To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-GTC) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. To avoid the need to log on again after resuming operation (for example, after your computer goes into standby or hibernate mode), check Always Resume the Secure Session. 3. Select the appropriate network certificate authority from the drop-down list. 4. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 5. Choose Token or Static Password, depending on the user database. Note that Token uses a hardware token device or the Secure Computing SofToken program (version 1.3 or later) to obtain and enter a one-time password during authentication. 6. Click Settings... and:

Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 7. Click OK. 8. Enable the profile. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 13 Using PEAP-MSCHAP V2 Security To use PEAP-MSCHAP V2 security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list. 3. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 4. Click Advanced and:

Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. 14 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Using LEAP Security To use security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. LEAP security requires that all infrastructure devices (e.g. access points and servers) are configured for LEAP authentication. Check with the IT manager. Configuring LEAP On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. Choose WPA-LEAP from the OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. Choose LEAP from the drop-down menu. drop-down menu. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Specify a user name and password. Select to Use Temporary User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the LEAP user name. OR: Check Manually Prompt for LEAP User Name and Password to manually login and start the LEAP authentication process. Select to Use Saved User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:

Specify the LEAP user name, password, and domain to save and use. 3. Enter the user name and password. 4. Confirm the password. 5. Specify a domain name:

Check the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name setting to pass the Windows login domain and user name to the RADIUS server. (default) OR: Enter a specific domain name. 6. If desired, check No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In to force the wireless adapter to disassociate after logging off. 7. Enter the LEAP authentication timeout time (between 30 and 500 seconds) to specify how long LEAP should wait before declaring authentication failed, and sending an error message. The default is 90 seconds. 8. Click OK. 9. Enable the profile. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 15 Pre-Shared Encryption Keys Defining pre-shared encryption keys:

1. Click the Pre-Shared Key (Static WEP) radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click the Configure button. 3. Fill in the fields in the Define Pre-Shared Keys dialog box:

Key Entry Determines the entry method for an encryption key: hexadecimal (0-9, A-F), or ASCII text (all keyboard characters except spaces). Encryption Keys WEP Keys

(1-4) Selects the default encryption keys used. Only allows the selection for a shared First, Second, Third, or Fourth key whose corresponding field has been completed. Defines a set of shared encryption keys for network configuration security. At least one Shared Key field must be populated to enable security using a shared key. Click on the radio button to set the key as the default encryption key. WEP Key Size Defines the size for each encryption key. The options include:

64-bit (enter 10 digits for hexadecimal, 5 ASCII characters) 128-bit (enter 26 digits for hexadecimal, 13 digits for ASCII) 152-bit (enter 32 digits hexadecimal, 16 digits for ASCII) 4. Click OK for the changes to take effect. Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key 1. Click the Pre-Shared Key radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click on Configure. 3. In the window, all existing static WEP keys are displayed as asterisks for security reasons. Click in the field of the existing static WEP key to overwrite. 4. Delete the asterisks in that field. 5. Enter a new key. 6. Make sure to select the Transmit Key button to the left of this key is selected for the key to transmit packets. 7. Click OK. Disabling Static WEP To disable static WEP for a particular profile, Select any other security option on the Profile Management tab to automatically disable static WEP OR: choose None on the Security tab to disable security, and click OK (not recommended). 16 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Using WPA Passphrase Security To use WPA Passphrase security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA Passphrase radio button. 2. Click on the Configure button. 3. Fill in the WPA Passphrase. 4. Click OK. Zero Configuration This section describes the operation of the Atheros Client Utility (ACU) and Windows XP Wireless Configuration Service (WZCS). Wireless Network Configuration The Windows WZCS is a service that manages the wireless connection in a largely dynamic way. Only minimal connection information must be identified and configured. To set Zero Configuration on Windows XP, take the following steps:

1. 2. Select the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. Zero Configuration. When this check box is selected, Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles:

SSID Security keys Ad hoc settings Note that Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles, thus users can not ( create new profiles with different settings while using Windows Zero Configuration. The Zero Configuration settings override all configuration profiles, even when you select other options. However, the ACU does still control the following settings when Zero Configuration is set:

Power settings Active/Passive scanning (where applicable) Transmit power Wireless band Short/Long preamble (802.11b) When Zero Configuration is in use, a pop-up message is displayed on the ACU when you attempt to create or edit a configuration profile from the Profile Management tab of the ACU. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 17 In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. To turn Zero Configuration off on Windows XP, take the following steps:

1. 2. Clear the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set Zero Configuration. When this check box is cleared, all profile settings are controlled by the configuration profile, which is set up from the ACU Profile Management tab. Check the Status Information or Diagnostics The Atheros client utility includes a number of tools to display current diagnostics and status information. Check current status Check driver information Check receive and transmit diagnostics Current Status The Current Status tab contains general information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Current Status screen. Profile Name The name of the current selected configuration profile. Set up the configuration name on the General tab. Link Status Shows whether the station is associated to the wireless network. Wireless Mode Displays the wireless mode. Configure the wireless mode on the Advanced tab. IP Address Displays the computer's IP address. Network Type The type of network the station is connected to. Options include:

Infrastructure (access point) Ad Hoc Configure the network type on the Advanced tab. Current Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Shows whether server based authentication is used. Server Based Authentication Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the encryption type on the Security tab. Signal Strength Shows the strength of the signal. 18 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Click the Advanced button to see the advanced status diagnostics. Adapter Information Button The Adapter Information button contains general information about the network interface card (the wireless network adapter) and the network driver interface specification (NDIS) driver. Access the adapter information from the Diagnostics tab. Card Name Name of the wireless network adapter. MAC Address MAC address of the wireless network adapter. Driver Driver name and path of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Version Version of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Date Creation date of the wireless network adapter driver. Client Name Name of the client computer. Diagnostics Tab The ACU Diagnostics tab provides allows retrieval of receive and transmit statistics. The Diagnostics tab does not require any configuration. It lists these receive and transmit diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted by the wireless network adapter:

Multicast packets transmitted and received Broadcast packets transmitted and received Unicast packets transmitted and received Total bytes transmitted and received The Adapter Information button has general information about the wireless network adapter and NDIS driver. The Advanced Statistics button to shows statistics for diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted to the wireless network adapter:

Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 19 Transmitted Frames Frames transmitted OK Frames retried Frames dropped No ACK frames ACK frames RTS frames Clear-to-send (CTS) frames No CTS frames Retried RTS frames Retried data frames Received Frames Frames received OK Beacons Frames with errors CRC errors Encryption errors Duplicate frames AP mismatches Data rate mismatches Authentication time-out Authentication rejects: the number of AP authentication failures received by the wireless network adapter Association time-out Association rejects: the number of AP authentication rejects received by the wireless network adapter Standard MIC OK Standard MIC errors CKIP MIC OK CKIP MIC errors Scan Available Networks Click the Scan button on the Profile Management tab to scan for available infrastructure and ad hoc networks. On this list, click Refresh to refresh the list at any time. Connecting to a different network Highlight a network name and click the Activate button to connect an available network. If no configuration profile exists for that network, the Profile Management window opens to the General tab. Fill in the profile name and click OK to create the configuration profile for that network. Infrastructure

(AP) Network Connected Infrastructure

(AP) Network 20 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Ad Hoc Network Connected Ad Hoc Network Encryption Active Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 21 Display Settings To change the display settings, choose Options > Display Settings from the menu. The display settings dialog box contains tools to set the:

Signal Strength Display Units Sets the units used when displaying signal strength: percentage (%) or dBm. Refresh Interval Use the up/down arrows to set the display refresh interval in seconds. Data Display Sets the display to cumulative or relative:

Relative displays the change in statistical data since the last update. Cumulative displays statistical data collected since opening the profile. ACU Tools Use the Action menu to access the Atheros Client Utility tools:

Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF Signal on all Atheros station reference designs. Enable/Disable Tray Icon Enable or disable the tray icon. Troubleshooting Run the optional Troubleshooting Utility. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to a LEAP-configured access point. Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. 22 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Tray Icon The tray icon appears at the bottom of the screen, and shows the signal strength using colors and the received signal strength indication (RSSI). Hold the mouse cursor over the tray icon to display the current configuration profile name and association, as well as transmit and receive speed and the wireless adapter name and IP address. Right-click on the tray icon to:

Help Open the online help. Open Atheros Client Utility Launch the Atheros Client Utility (ACU). Use the ACU to configure a profile or view status and statistics information. Troubleshooting Run the Troubleshooting Utility. Preferences Set the ACU startup and menu options. Check to start the program automatically when Windows starts, and check menu items that should appear on the popup menu. Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF signal. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to the access point. Select Profile Click a configuration profile name to switch to. If no configuration profile exists for a connection, add a profile. Show Connection Status Shows whether auto profile selection is enabled. This window displays connection information:

Active Profile Displays the active configuration profile name. Auto Profile Selection Connection Status Link Quality SSID Access Point Name Access Point IP Address Link Speed Adapter IP Address Displays whether the adapter is connected to a wireless network. Lists the quality of the link connection. Displays the SSID of the associated network. Shows the name of the AP the wireless adapter is connected to. Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is connected to. Lists the speed of the link connection. Displays the IP address of the wireless adapter. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 23 Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. The colors are defined as follows:

Color Green Green Yellow Red Gray Quality Excellent Good Poor Poor RSSI*

20 dB +

10-20 dB +

5-10 dB

< 5 dB No Connection No Connection

*Received signal strength indication RSSI. Displayed in dB or percentage. Enable or disable the tray icon in the Action menu. Ad Hoc Mode In ad hoc mode, a wireless network adapter works within an independent basic service set (IBSS), as illustrated here. All stations communicate directly with other stations without using an access point (AP). To connect to an ad hoc network, configure the profile for ad hoc mode. Ad Hoc operation may be limited by Hardware to meet regulatory requirements. Ad Hoc Mode Profile Configuration To configure a profile in ad hoc mode, change the Network Type in the Profile Management's Advanced tab. For ad hoc mode, modify the settings:

Network Name (on General Tab) Transmit Power Level 24 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. 802.11b Preamble (if using 802.11b) Wireless Mode When Starting an Ad Hoc Network Make sure to also edit the General and Security tabs. Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode In infrastructure (access point (AP)) mode, the wireless network adapter participates in a basic service set (BSS) as a station, and communicates with the other stations through an AP, as illustrated here. To connect to an access point network, configure the profile for access point mode. Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode Profile Configuration To configure a profile in infrastructure (access point) mode, change the Network Type in the Advanced tab. For access point mode, modify the settings:

802.11b Preamble (if using 802.11b) Power Save Mode Wireless Mode 802.11 Authentication Mode Make sure to also edit the General and Security tabs. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 25 Uninstall an Old Driver Uninstall an old driver before upgrading to a new NDIS driver release. To remove the newly installed driver from the system if the system does not have previously installed versions of the NDIS driver, proceed to Step 4. 1. To remove the NDIS driver from the OS, go to Device Manager, right-click Atheros AR500x Wireless Network Adapter, and choose Uninstall. 2. Click OK to uninstall the device. 3. When the device is uninstalled from Device Manager, search for and delete the driver files that reside in the system. a. Go to the Start menu and choose Search > For Files or Folders. b. Enter oem*.inf in the Search for files or folders named: field, and enter Atheros in the Containing text: field. c. Click Search Now. A few files matching these criteria are possible, if previous drivers have not been removed properly. d. Choose the files that have been found and delete them from the system. 4. To complete the uninstallation, remove the file ar5211.sys from the folder

\WINNT\system32\drivers. Additional Security Features These security features prevent attacks on a wireless network's WEP keys. The wireless adapter automatically supports each of these features, but these features must be enabled on the access point. Message Integrity Check (MIC) MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. In a bit-flip attack, someone intercepts an encrypted message retransmits it after some alterations. Thus the receiver accepts the message as legitimate. The MIC adds some bytes to each packet to protect it against tampering. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) This feature prevents attacks on WEP in which someone catches encrypted packets and uses their initialization vector (IV) to decipher the WEP key. TKIP removes the predictability to protect both unicast and broadcast WEP keys. Broadcast Key Rotation EAP authentication provides dynamic unicast WEP keys for wireless adapters, but uses static broadcast keys. In broadcast WEP key rotation, the access point supplies a dynamic broadcast WEP key and changes it at intervals. 26 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Advanced Status Information Click the Advanced button on the Current Status tab of the Atheros Client Utility to see advanced information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Advanced Status screen. Network Name (SSID) Displays the wireless network name. Configure the network name on the General tab. Shows whether server based authentication is used. Server Based Authentication Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the encryption type on the Security tab. Authentication Type Displays the authentication mode. Message Integrity Check Configure the authentication mode on the General tab. Shows whether MIC is enabled. MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. Associated AP Name Displays the name of the access point the wireless adapter is Associated AP IP Address Associated AP MAC Address associated to. Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Displays the MAC address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Power Save Mode Shows the power save mode. Power management is disabled in ad hoc mode. Configure the power save mode on the Advanced tab. Current Power Level Displays the transmit power level rate in mW. Current Signal Strength Shows the current signal strength in dBm. Current Noise Level Displays the current noise level in dBm. Up Time Shows how long the client adapter has been receiving power (in hours:minutes:seconds). If the adapter runs for more than 24 hours, the display shows in days:hours:minutes:seconds. 802.11b Preamble Displays the 802.11b preamble format. Configure the preamble format on the Advanced tab. Current Receive Rate Shows the current receive rate in Mbps. Current Transmit Rate Displays the current transmit rate in Mbps. Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Frequency Displays frequency the station is using. Channel Set Shows the current channel set. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 27 Regulatory Compliance Notices USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

FCC ID#: PPD-AR5BXB63 1. Antennas must be installed to provide 20 cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2. Only those antennas filed under FCC ID:PPD-AR5BXB63 can be used with this device. 3. When the Minicard is installed in a system where the antenna location is less than 20 cm separation distance to the body of the user, additional equipment authorization is required. 4. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID:PPD-AR5BXB63 . 5. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module. 6. AR5BXB63 must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 28 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. European Community CE Notice:

The CE! mark indicates compliance with the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC. Such marking is indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards:

EN 300 328 EN 301 489-17 EN 60950 Marking by the symbol: ! indicates that usage restrictions apply in countries listed on this products packaging. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 29 Taiwan DGT Radio Compliance:

2.4GHz Operation 30 July 2006 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Atheros Communications, Inc. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2006 31